2007 honda civic hatchback owners manual (australian, type r)

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when itis sold.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing.Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Although this manual is applicable to both right-hand and left-hand drive models, the illustrations contained in thismanual mainly refer to the left-hand drive models.The illustrations of vehicles with diesel engine are noted by Diesel model, and these illustrations mainly refer to theright-hand drive models.

This owner’s manual covers all versions. Therefore, you may find descriptions of equipment and features that are noton your particular vehicle.

06/12/06 10:28:33 32SMR600_001

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual orthe separate service information booklet helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needsmaintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained inservicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicatedto your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions andconcerns.

Best wishes and happy motoring.

Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you toread this owner’s manual for proper and safe operation of your vehicle.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

(On German type)Mounting the front licence plate:Mount the front licence plate tothe provided holder taking carethat the upper edge of the licenceplate does not project above theupper surface of the bumper.

Mounting the rear licence plate:Mount the rear licence plate to theback of the vehicle so that itslower edge is flush with the lowerend of the surface provided formounting.

Several other booklets explain the warranties that protect your new vehicle.Read the Service Book/warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand thecoverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.

Congratulations! Your selection was a wise investment. It will give you yearsof driving pleasure.

1.

2.

Introduction

i

06/12/06 10:28:41 32SMR600_002

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

ii

06/12/06 10:28:51 32SMR600_003

Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator,message and symbol on the multi-information display and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

What fuel to use, how to break-inyour new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park;plus what you need to know ifyou’re planning to tow a trailer.

The maintenance schedule showsyou when you need to take yourvehicle to the dealer. There is alsoa list of things to check andinstructions on how to check them.

Tips on cleaning and protectingyour vehicle.

This section covers severalproblems motorists sometimesexperience, and details how tohandle them.

ID numbers, dimensions,capacities, and technicalinformation.

Important information about theproper use and care of yourvehicle’s seat belts, an overview ofthe supplemental restraint system,and valuable information on howto protect children with childrestraints.

How to operate the heating andventilation system/climate controlsystem, the audio system, andother convenience features.

Contents

..........Your Vehicle at a Glance . 2

....Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

.....Instruments and Controls . 69

............................Features . 187

...................Before Driving . 297

..............................Driving . 315

......................Maintenance . 353

................Appearance Care . 423

Taking Care of the.......................Unexpected . 431

.........Technical Information . 483

................................Index . 497

1

06/12/06 10:29:04 32SMR600_004

＊

＊

＊

: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

Left-hand drive type

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

(P.12, 28)

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG(P.12, 28)

BONNET RELEASEHANDLE

Vehicle without navigation system is shown. i-SHIFT

CLOCK

HAZARD WARNING BUTTONDRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

AUDIO SYSTEM

SUNSHADE SWITCH

(P.172)

(P.151)

(P.168)

(P.299)

(P.301)

(P.326)(P.322)

(P.145)

(P.212)

(P.270)

(P.170)(P.189, 195)(P.89)

06/12/06 10:29:10 32SMR600_005

＊＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.Optional on vehicles with navigation system

1 :2 :3 :4 : If equipped


3


HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER

VSA OFF SWITCH

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTONENGINE START BUTTON

HORN

Vehicle without navigation system is shown.

WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/HEATED MIRROR

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

HANDS-FREETELEPHONESYSTEMBUTTONS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/REAR FOG LIGHTS/FRONT FOG LIGHTS(P.140, 142, 143)

(P.318, 319, 320)

(P.146)

(P.280)

(P.269) (P.147)

(P.90)

(P.182)

(P.276)

(P.145)

(P.145, 173)(P.137)

(P.144)

(P.342)

2

1

3

4

4

4

06/12/06 10:29:19 32SMR600_006

＊

＊

＊

: If equipped


4


MIRROR CONTROLS



Right-hand drive type



CLOCK

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG


(P.12, 28)


MANUAL TRANSMISSIONDRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P.12, 28)

i-SHIFT

AUDIO SYSTEM

SUNSHADE SWITCH

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

(P.189, 195) (P.170)

(P.270)

(P.212)

(P.145)

(P.326)(P.322)

(P.301)

(P.299)

(P.168)

(P.151)

(P.172)

(P.89)

06/12/06 10:29:26 32SMR600_007

＊＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.Optional on vehicles with navigation system

1 :2 :

If equipped3 :4 :


5


HAZARD WARNING BUTTON


VSA OFF SWITCH

WINDSCREENWIPERS/WASHERS

HEADLIGHTADJUSTER





ENGINE STARTBUTTON

mph to km/hCHANGE BUTTON

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONSCIGARETTE

LIGHTER

HORN

Without cruise controlWith navigation system

(P.85)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS Vehicle without navigation system is shown.



HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/REAR FOG LIGHTS/FRONT FOG LIGHTS

(P.145)

(P.90)

(P.280)

(P.144)

(P.182)

(P.269)

(P.147)

(P.90)

(P.276)

(P.146)

(P.318, 319, 320)

(P.317)

(P.342)

(P.140, 142, 143)(P.145, 173)

3

2

1

4

4

4

06/12/06 10:29:35 32SMR600_008

6

06/12/06 10:29:38 32SMR600_009

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.........................................Airbags . 12

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 14......................1. Close the Doors . 14

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 15............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 16

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 165. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 176. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 22

..Seat Belt System Components . 22......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 23

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 24

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 25Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 27......Airbag System Components . 27

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 28

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 30..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

.............................Airbag Service . 32...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 34

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 34

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 35

The Passenger’s Front Airbag................Poses Serious Risks . 35

The Side Airbag Poses Serious.........................................Risks . 38

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 39

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 39

...Additional Safety Precautions . 39Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 41.......................Protecting Infants . 41

.........Protecting Small Children . 43Selecting a Child Restraint

..........................................System . 44Installing a Child Restraint

......................................System . 46Child Restraint System for EU

.................................Countries . 47....With the Lower Anchorages . 49

.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 52..............................With a Tether . 58

...........Protecting Larger Children . 60...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 61

..................Using a Booster Seat . 61When Can a Larger Child Sit in

.........................................Front . 63...Additional Safety Precautions . 64

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 65...................................Safety Labels . 66

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

06/12/06 10:29:42 32SMR600_010

－You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child restraint system. Largerchildren should use a booster seatand a lap/shoulder belt until theycan use the belt properly without a

booster seat (see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tyre blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tyrepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page , and forEU countries, Australia, and NewZealand, see the separate serviceinformation booklet that came withyour vehicle).

17

34 64

355

Important Safety Precautions


Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

8

06/12/06 10:29:52 32SMR600_011

＊

＊

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features


always wearyour seat belts

9

(3) (4)

(6)

(2)(8)

(6)(7)

(2)

(5)

(7)

(9)

(1)

(9)

(11)

(8)

(10)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners

: On some models

06/12/06 10:29:59 32SMR600_012

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument panelto remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child restraint systems.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In most European Countries there isa law covering the use of seat belts.Please take time to familiarizeyourself with the legal requirementsof the countries in which you willdrive.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.



Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

10

Not wearing a seat beltproperly increases thechance of serious injury ordeath in a crash, even thoughyour vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

06/12/06 10:30:09 32SMR600_013

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Seat belts are designed to bear uponthe bony structure of the body, andshould be worn low across the frontof the pelvis or the pelvis, chest andshoulders, as applicable; wearing thelap section of the belt across theabdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted asfirmly as possible, consistent withcomfort, to provide the protection forwhich they have been designed. Aslack belt will greatly reduce theprotection afforded to the wearer.

Belts should not be worn with strapstwisted.

Each belt assembly must only be usedby one occupant; it is dangerous toput a belt around a child being carriedon the occupant’s lap.



What You Should Do:

11

WARNING:

06/12/06 10:30:16 32SMR600_014

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

28

29

30

Only on models equipped with sidecurtain airbags


Airbags


12

06/12/06 10:30:23 32SMR600_015

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.



Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

13

06/12/06 10:30:30 32SMR600_016

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed.

Your vehicle has a door and tailgateopen monitor display on the multi-information display to indicate whena specific door or the tailgate is nottightly closed.

The above illustration shows that alldoors and the tailgate are open.

See page for how the monitordisplay works.

34 40

99

Protecting Adults and Teens


Close the DoorsIntroduction 1.

14

06/12/06 10:30:38 32SMR600_017

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

In addition to adjusting the seat, youcan adjust the steering wheel up anddown, and in and out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

After you adjust a manual seat, rockit back and forth to make sure it islocked into position. See page forhow to adjust the front seats.

147

160



Adjust the Front Seats2.

15

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back fromthe front airbags as possible.

06/12/06 10:30:45 32SMR600_018

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecentre of the steering wheel.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe centre of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

160

Adjust the Seat-Backs Adjust the Head Restraints3. 4.


Driver and Passenger Safety16

Reclining the seat-back toofar can result in serious injuryor death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

06/12/06 10:30:54 32SMR600_019

CONTINUED

When a passenger is seated in therear centre seating position, makesure the centre head restraint isadjusted to its highest position.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

162

Except for Type-R model



Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

17

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positionedproperly before driving.

06/12/06 10:31:02 32SMR600_020

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the centre ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

22



Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

18

Improperly positioning theseat belts can cause seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

RELEASE BUTTON

06/12/06 10:31:11 32SMR600_021

In a front passenger leans sidewaysand his head is in the deploymentpath of the side airbag, an inflatingside airbag can strike the passengerwith enough force to very seriouslyinjure him.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.



Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.

19

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well backin the seat, with your feet onthe floor.

06/12/06 10:31:17 32SMR600_022

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do,they could be very seriouslyinjured in a crash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions



Never let passengers ride on top ofa folded-down rear seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

20

06/12/06 10:31:25 32SMR600_023

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

This could result in injuries if yourside curtain airbags inflates.



Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

On models with side curtainairbags, do not put a coat hangeror hard objects on a coat hook.

21

06/12/06 10:31:31 32SMR600_024

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the seat beltsin all seating positions.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

The front passenger’s seat belt usemonitoring system uses the occupantdetection sensor in the frontpassenger’s seat. The system maynot work properly under theseconditions:

You place heavy items on the frontpassenger’s seat.

You place a cushion on the frontpassenger’s seat.

The front passenger is not sittingproperly.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

You will also see a symbol ‘‘ ’’(for a driver)/‘‘ ’’ (for a frontpassenger), or a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘PASSENGER FASTENSEAT BELT’’ message with asymbol on the multi-informationdisplay to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

The seat belt system also monitorsthe seat belt use of all rear seatingpositions according to each seat beltbuckle latch function. The multi-information display will show you theseat belt use on the rear seat (seepage ).98

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


Seat Belt System Components

22

06/12/06 10:31:41 32SMR600_025

CONTINUED

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

Have your vehicle checked by adealer if the indicator comes on orthe beeper sounds when there is nofront passenger or there are noobjects on the front seat.

17



Lap/Shoulder Belt

23

SHOULDERPORTION

LATCHPLATE

BUCKLE

UPPERSEATBELTANCHOR

LAP PORTION

06/12/06 10:31:49 32SMR600_026

If a side or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

The seat belts in all rear seatingpositions have an additional lockableretractor that must be activated tosecure a child restraint (see page

).

The SRS indicator willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).30

52



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

24

06/12/06 10:31:58 32SMR600_027

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.Pull each belt out fully, and look for

frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.429

No modifications oradditions should be made by the userwhich will either prevent the seat beltadjusting devices from operating toremove slack, or prevent the seat beltassembly from being adjusted to removeslack.

It is essential to replacethe entire assembly after it has beenworn in a severe impact even if damageto the assembly is not obvious.

Care should be taken toavoid contamination of the webbing withpolishes, oils and chemicals, andparticularly battery acid. Cleaning maysafely be carried out using mild soap andwater. The belt should be replaced ifwebbing becomes frayed, contaminatedor damaged.

CONTINUED

Seat Belt Maintenance



WARNING:

WARNING:

WARNING:

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result inserious injury or death if theseat belts do not workproperly when needed.

Check your seat beltsregularly and have anyproblem corrected as soon aspossible.

06/12/06 10:32:06 32SMR600_028

When replacing the seat belts, makecertain to use the anchorage pointsshown in the illustrations.

(Front Seat)

(Rear Seat)

The rear seat has two lap/shoulderbelts.

The rear seat has three lap/shoulderbelts.

(Rear Seat)Type-R modelExcept for Type-R model



Anchorage Points

26

06/12/06 10:32:14 32SMR600_029

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the centre ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and a frontpassenger’s seat belt is latched orunlatched (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

On models equipped with two sidecurtain airbags, one for each sideof the vehicle. The airbags arestored in the ceiling, above theside windows. The front and rearpillars on both sides are marked‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (seepage ).

24

28

29

30

22

30

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags


06/12/06 10:32:24 32SMR600_030

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassengers’ front airbags, andactivate the automatic seat belttensioners.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

How Your Front Airbags Work



06/12/06 10:32:31 32SMR600_031

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If a front seat passenger leanssideways and his head is in thedeployment path of the side airbag,he can be seriously injured by aninflating side airbag. An inflatingside airbag can strike the child withenough force to kill or very seriouslyinjure a child. For the information ofthe side airbags hazards, see pages

and .

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side. 38 60

How Your Side Airbags Work



29

06/12/06 10:32:38 32SMR600_032

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags, sensors, or seatbelt tensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

(On some models)



SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

06/12/06 10:32:49 32SMR600_033

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ’’ or the symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

105



Ignoring the SRS indicatorcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbag systems ortensioners do not workproperly.

Have your vehicle checked bya dealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts youto a possible problem.

06/12/06 10:32:54 32SMR600_034

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags and automatic seat belttensioners to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Your airbag systems and automaticseat belt tensioners are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If anairbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Handling is allowed by trainedpersonnel only. It is prohibited toremove the airbag unit/belt-tensioner from the vehicle. In case ofmalfunction, shutdown or afterairbag inflation/belt-tensioneroperation you have to ask a qualifiedshop for repair or removal.

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbag andautomatic seat belt tensionercomponents or wiring for anyreason.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.



06/12/06 10:33:01 32SMR600_035

If water or another liquidsoaks into the seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.



06/12/06 10:33:05 32SMR600_036

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, infants andchildren should be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages).

(see pages ).41 59

60 64

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved childrestraint system that is properlysecured to the vehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines


Children who areunrestrained or improperlyrestrained can be seriouslyinjured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in an approvedchild restraint system. Alarger child should beproperly restrained with aseat belt and use a boosterseat if necessary.

06/12/06 10:33:12 32SMR600_037

－

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating airbag when they ride in theback.

In most countries, child restraintsystems must meet thespecifications of the ECE 44regulation.

In many countries, the law requireschildren younger than 12 years ofage and less than 150 cm (60 in) inheight to be secured in an officiallyapproved and suitable child restraintsystem. In those countries, officiallyapproved and suitable child restraintsystems must therefore be used inorder to transport a child on anypassenger seat whatsoever. Pleasecheck your local legal requirements.

According to crash statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. It is recommended that allchildren age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the airbag inflates, itcan hit the back of the child restraintsystem with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure an infant.

CONTINUED

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks

Infants



Never put a rearward facing childrestraint system in the front seat of avehicle equipped with a passenger’sfront airbag.

35

06/12/06 10:33:20 32SMR600_038

－

As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94; If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the rearwardfacing child restraint system withgreat force. The rearward facingchild restraint system can bedislodged or struck with enoughforce to cause very serious injury tothe infant.

If thevehicle seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, an inflating frontairbag can strike the child withenough force to kill or very seriouslyinjure a small child.

Wheneverpossible, larger children should sit inthe back seat, in a booster seat ifneeded, and be properly restrainedwith a seat belt (see page forimportant information aboutprotecting larger children).

In all cases observe the legalrequirements of the countries inwhich you will drive.

60Small Children

Larger Children

Placing a front facing child restraintsystem in the front seat of a vehicleequipped with a passenger’s frontairbag can be hazardous.

Children who have outgrown childrestraint systems are also at risk ofbeing injured or killed by an inflatingpassenger’s front airbag.



DO NOT place rear-facingchild seat on this seat withairbag.

DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURYcan occur.

06/12/06 10:33:27 32SMR600_039

－

As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the windscreen, onthe front passenger’s doorjamb andon the front visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.





Extreme Hazard!

DO NOT use a rearwardfacing child restraint on aseat protected by an airbag infront of it!

06/12/06 10:33:34 32SMR600_040

－

Side airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere side impact.If any part of a child’s body is in thepath of a deploying airbag, aninflating side airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a child.

To remind you of the side airbagshazards, and that children must beproperly restrained in the back seat,your vehicle has the safety label oneach front doorjamb.



The Side Airbag Poses SeriousRisks

38

Leaning over the front doorcan result in serious injury ordeath if the side airbaginflates.

Always sit upright with theirback against the seat-back.

06/12/06 10:33:39 32SMR600_041

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision or a side impact, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


19

17

160

60

CONTINUED

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.



06/12/06 10:33:50 32SMR600_042

－

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in somecountries, and can be veryhazardous.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside thevehicle. Teach your children not toplay in or around vehicles.

‘‘Never let children kneel on seats orstand while the vehicle is in motion.The violent forces created duringemergency braking will cause thechildren to be thrown forward. Thechildren could be seriously injured orkilled.’’

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

52 56

Always take the ignitionkey with you whenever you leave thevehicle alone (with other occupants).Use the main power

window switch to prevent childrenfrom opening the windows. Using thisfeature will prevent children fromplaying with the windows, whichcould expose them to hazards ordistract the driver (see page ).168

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Lock both doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.



WARNING:

WARNING:

06/12/06 10:33:58 32SMR600_043

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild restraint system until the childreaches the restraint system maker’sweight or height limit for therestraint system, and the child is atleast one year old.

A rearward facing child restraintsystem can be placed in any seatingposition in the back seat, but not inthe front.

For EU countries, an approvedrearward facing child restraintsystem should be placed in anyseating position in the back seat (seepage ).

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of therestraint with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

Only a rearward facing childrestraint system provides propersupport for a baby’s head, neck andback.

Two types of restraints may be used:a restraint system designedexclusively for infants, or aconvertible restraint system used inthe rearward facing, reclining mode.

For EU countries, refer to pagefor the recommended child

restraint system.

If placed facing forward, aninfant could be very seriously injuredduring a frontal collision.

4747

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Restraint System Type

Rearward Facing Child RestraintSystem Placement

Never put a rearwardfacing child restraint system in thefront seat.

Do not put a rearward facing childrestraint system in a forward-facingposition.

Protecting Infants and Small Children


06/12/06 10:34:08 32SMR600_044

As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;When properly installed, a rearwardfacing child restraint system mayprevent the driver or a frontpassenger from moving their seat asfar back as recommended, or fromlocking their seat-back in the desiredposition.

In either situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childrestraint system directly behind thefront passenger seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or you may wish to geta smaller rearward facing childrestraint system.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the rearwardfacing child restraint system withgreat force. The rearward facingchild restraint system can bedislodged or struck with enoughforce to cause very serious injury tothe infant.





Placing a rearward facingchild restraint system in thefront seat can result inserious injury or death duringa collision.

Always place a rearwardfacing child restraint systemin the back seat, not the front.

06/12/06 10:34:15 32SMR600_045

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the childrestraint system maker’s weight andheight limits, should be restrained ina front facing, upright child restraintsystem.

Of the different restraint systemsavailable, we recommend those thathave a five-point harness system asshown.

We also recommend that a smallchild uses the child restraint systemas long as possible, until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the restraint system.


restraint system.

We strongly recommend placing afront facing child restraint system ina back seat, not the front.

If the vehicle seatis too far forward, or the child’s headis thrown forward during a collision,an inflating airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries.

If it is necessary to put a front facingchild restraint system in the front,move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible, and be sure thechild restraint system is firmlysecured to the vehicle and the childis properly strapped in the restraintsystem.47

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Restraint System Type

Child Restraint System Placement

Placing a front facing child restraintsystem in the front seat of a vehicleequipped with a passenger’s airbagcan be hazardous.



Placing a front facing childrestraint system in the frontseat can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbag inflates.

If you must place a frontfacing child restraint systemin front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible,and properly restrain thechild.

06/12/06 10:34:25 32SMR600_046

In mostcountries, child restraint systemsmust meet the specifications ofthe ECE 44 regulation. Look forthe approval mark on the systemand the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box.

Whatever type of child restraint youchoose, to provide proper protection,a child restraint system should meetthree requirements:

The manufacturer of the vehicledoes not assume any responsibilityfor damage which would be causedby a defect inherent in therecommended child restraint system.

When buying a child restraintsystem, you need to choose either aconventional child restraint system,or one designed for use with thelower anchorages and tethers.

Conventional child restraint systemsmust be secured to a vehicle with aseat belt, whereas lower anchoragessystem-compatible child restraintsystems are secured by attaching therestraint to hardware built into thetwo outer seating positions in theback seat.

Since lower anchorages system-compatible child restraint systemsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation, ifyour vehicle is equipped with thelower anchorages system, werecommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting alower anchorages system-compatiblechild restraint system with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In EU countries, a child restraintsystem with a flexible anchor is notavailable.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with lower anchorages, alower anchorages system-compatiblechild restraint system can beinstalled using a seat belt.

49The child restraint system shouldmeet safety standards.

1.

Selecting a Child Restraint System


06/12/06 10:34:33 32SMR600_047

Rearward facing for infants, frontfacing for small children.

Make sure the restraint system fitsyour child. Check the manufacturer’sinstructions and labels for height andweight limits.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild restraint system, or using apreviously purchased one, werecommend that you test therestraint system in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the child restraint system willbe used.


restraint system.47

The child restraint system shouldbe of the proper type and size to fitthe child.

The child restraint system shouldfit the vehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

3.2.

Selecting a Child Restraint System


06/12/06 10:34:39 32SMR600_048

A child restraint system securedwith a seat belt should be installed asfirmly as possible. However, it doesnot need to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Someside-to-side movement can beexpected and should not reduce thechild restraint system’s effectiveness.

Afterinstalling a child restraint system,push and pull the restraint systemforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

If the child restraint system is notsecure, try installing it in a differentseating position, or use a differentstyle of child restraint system thatcan be firmly secured.

After selecting a proper childrestraint system and a good place toinstall the restraint system, there arethree main steps in installing therestraint system:

All childrestraint systems must be securedto the vehicle with the lap part of alap/shoulder belt or with the loweranchorages system. A child whoserestraint system is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

Make sure thechild is properly strapped in thechild restraint system according tothe child restraint system maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a childrestraint system can be seriouslyinjured in a crash.

The following pages provide therecommended child restraintsystems for EU countries andguidelines on how to properly installa child restraint system. A frontfacing child restraint system is usedin all examples, but the instructionsare the same for a rearward facingchild restraint system.


restraint system.

If you use a lap/shoulder beltwithout an additional lockableretractor, be sure you install alocking clip on the seat belt (seepage ).57

47

Except for European models

Make sure the child restraintsystem is firmly secured.

Properly secure the child restraintsystem to the vehicle.

Secure the child in the childrestraint system.

1.

3.2.

Installing a Child Restraint System


06/12/06 10:34:47 32SMR600_049

＋

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

Various types of child restraint systems are available. Not all types are suitable for your vehicle. Please refer to thetable below to select which category of child restraint system can be used on each seating position.

Suitable for particular ISO FIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in this table.Suitable for front facing ISO FIX child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this massgroup.Suitable for ‘‘universal’’ category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.Move the front seat to its rearmost position.

The particular child restraints in the above table are Honda Genuine Parts. They are available from your dealer.

A size class is specified for some child restraint systems. Make sure to check the size class as indicated on themanufacturer’s instructions, package, and labels of the child restraint.

U:X:

IL:IUF:

1:2: Except for Type-R

Seating PositionRear passenger

OutboardU

IL (Honda BABY-SAFEISO FIX) or U

IUF (Size class A, B1, B)or U

UU

Mass Group

group 0 Up to 10 kggroup 0 Up to 13 kg

group I 9 kg to 18 kg

group II 15 kg to 25 kggroup III 22 kg to 36 kg

Front passenger

XX

Honda LORD

Honda KIDHonda KID

CentreHonda BABY-SAFEHonda BABY-SAFE

Honda LOAD

Honda KIDHonda KID

CONTINUED

1

1

1

2


Child Restraint System for EU Countries

For a correct installation, please refer to the Child Restraint Instruction Manual.


06/12/06 10:35:00 32SMR600_050

Your vehicle is equipped with loweranchorages at the outer seatingpositions on the rear seat. Theseanchorages are only to be used witha child restraint system designed tobe attached to the lower anchorages.Refer to page for how to install achild restraint system to the loweranchorages.

49



The use of any child restraintsystem which is not suitablefor your vehicles would notproperly secure the infant orchild who could therefore bekilled or seriously injured.

06/12/06 10:35:04 32SMR600_051

Your vehicle is equipped with loweranchorages at the outer rear seats.These anchorages are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child restraint system designed foruse with the lower anchorages.

To install a child restraint systemdesigned to be attached to the loweranchorages:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchorages.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchorages that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child restraint systemand the anchorages.

The location of each loweranchorage is indicated by a smallbutton above the anchorage point.


restraint system.

1.

2.

47

CONTINUED

Installing a Child RestraintSystem with the LowerAnchorages



LOWERANCHORAGES

06/12/06 10:35:12 32SMR600_052

Place the child restraint system onthe vehicle seat, then attach thechild restraint system to the loweranchorages according to the childrestraint system maker’sinstructions.

Some child restraint systemsdesigned for use with loweranchorages have a rigid-typeconnector as shown above.

When using the guide-cups,always follow the child restraintsystem manufacturer’sinstructions.

Attach the guide-cups to thelower anchorages as shown inthe illustration.

You may use optional guide-cupsthat came with your child restraintsystem to install it to the loweranchorages without damaging theseat surface.

4.3. On some child restraint systems



Rigid type

GUIDE-CUPGUIDE-CUP

LOWER ANCHORAGE

06/12/06 10:35:20 32SMR600_053

CONTINUED

Other child restraints have a flexible-type connector as shown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child restraint system maker’sinstructions for adjusting ortightening the fit.

Flexible type child restraintsystem is available in somecountries. In EU countries, thistype is not available.

Attach the attaching clip to theanchor fitting as shown in theillustration. Make sure the strap isnot twisted, then tighten the strapaccording to the child restraintsystem maker’s instructions.

The above illustration shows howthe attaching clip should be routedin EU countries.

5.

6.



Flexible type ATTACHING CLIP

ANCHOR FITTING

Front

06/12/06 10:35:28 32SMR600_054

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child restraintsystem forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

The design and suitability of thechild restraint systems must becarefully checked with the childrestraint system manufacturerconcerned and the seller of thosesystems. If you are not sure, consultyour dealer before purchasing thistype of child restraint system.

Attach the attaching clip to theanchor fitting, then tighten the strapas instructed by the child restraintsystem maker.

When not using the loweranchorages system, all childrestraint systems must be secured tothe vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

7.

162



Installing a Child RestraintSystem with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

52

ATTACHING CLIP

ANCHOR FITTING

Front

06/12/06 10:35:35 32SMR600_055

CONTINUED

The procedures in the followingpages are described based on a frontfacing child restraint systemavailable in EU countries.

Place the child restraint system inthe desired back seating position.Make sure the child restraint ispositioned well back in the seat-back.

If you place the child restraintsystem in either rear outer seatingposition and use the tether strap foradditional security, make sure topush down the head restraint to thelowest position and attach theattaching clip to the anchor fittingbefore securing the child restraintsystem with the lap/shoulder belt.

To properly route a lap/shoulder beltthrough a child restraint system,follow the restraint system maker’sinstructions.

For EU countries, refer to pagefor installing a child restraint

system.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inthe back seating positions have alockable retractor that must beactivated to secure a child restraintsystem.

The seat belt with a lockableretractor has a label as shown in theillustration above.

1.47



LABEL

SEAT BELT

06/12/06 10:35:43 32SMR600_056

After the belt has retracted, tugon it. If the belt is locked, youwill not be able to pull it out. Ifyou can pull the belt out, it is notlocked, and you will need torepeat these steps.

Push down the tab. Route theshoulder part of the belt into theslit at the side of the restraint,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops.

Route the belt through therestraint according to the restraintsystem maker’s instructions, theninsert the latch plate into thebuckle.

4.3.

5.

2.



TAB

06/12/06 10:35:50 32SMR600_057

CONTINUED

Secure the belt in the slit bypushing up the tab. Make sure thebelt is not twisted and it ispositioned properly in the slit.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child restraintsystem, or push on the back of therestraint system while pulling upon the belt.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child restraint system will notbe secure.

7.6.



55

06/12/06 10:35:55 32SMR600_058

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child restraint system,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

When you secure a child restraintsystem with a lap/shoulder belt, besure you install a locking clip on theseat belt.

Push and pull the child restraintsystem forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secureenough to stay upright duringnormal driving manoeuvres. If thechild restraint system is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

8.On vehicles without lockable retractorfitted to the seat where the child ispositioned




56

LOCKING CLIP

06/12/06 10:36:02 32SMR600_059

To install a locking clip, do thefollowing:

Place the child restraint in the seatwith a lap/shoulder belt. Route thelap/shoulder belt through therestraint according to the seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

Insert the latch plate into thebuckle. Pull on the shoulder partof the belt to make sure there isno slack in the lap portion.

Tightly grasp the belt near thelatch plate. Pinch both parts of thebelt together so they won’t slipthrough the latch plate. Unbucklethe seat belt.

Install the locking clip as shown.Position the clip as close aspossible to the latch plate.

If it is necessary to put a front facingchild restraint system in the front,move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible, be sure the childrestraint system is firmly secured tothe vehicle, and the child is properlystrapped in the restraint system (seepage ).

A locking clip is usually includedwith the child restraint system. Ifyou need a clip, contact the seat’smanufacturer or a store that sellschild restraints.

Always use a seat belt locking clipwhen you secure a child restraintsystem to your vehicle with a lap/shoulder belt. This helps prevent therestraint system from shiftingposition or overturning.

Insert the latch plate into thebuckle. Push and pull on the childrestraint system to verify that it isheld firmly in place. If it is not,repeat these steps until therestraint is secure.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

43

On vehicles without lockable retractorfitted to the seat where the child ispositioned



Using a Seat Belt Locking ClipExcept for European models

57

LOCKING CLIP

06/12/06 10:36:12 32SMR600_060

Children riding in vehicles should berestrained to minimize the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident.

The above illustration shows howthe tether strap should be routedin EU countries.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (The owners may checkwith the child restraint systemmaker to determine whether a tetheris available for a particular childrestraint system.)

After properly securing the childrestraint system (see page or

), route the tether strap overthe seat-back and on both sides ofthe head restraint as shown.A child restraint system with a tether

can be installed in the two outerpositions in the back seat, using oneof the anchor points shown in theillustration.

1.49

52

Installing a Child RestraintSystem with a Tether



Using an Anchor Fitting

58

TETHER ANCHOR POINTS

ANCHOR FITTING

ANCHOR FITTING

ATTACHING CLIP

TETHER STRAP

Front

06/12/06 10:36:20 32SMR600_061

Lift the cover, then attach theattaching clip to the anchor fitting,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Tighten the tether strap accordingto the child restraint systemmaker’s instructions.

To attach the tether to the childrestraint system, follow the childrestraint system maker’sinstructions.

When the child restraint system isused, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraintsystem.

Lift the head restraint, then routethe tether strap over the seat-backand through the head restraint legs.

2.

3.

Child restraintanchorages are designed to withstandonly those loads imposed by correctlyfitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts, harnesses or forattaching other items or equipment tothe vehicle.

On some models



WARNING:

ATTACHING CLIP

ANCHOR FITTING

Front

06/12/06 10:36:29 32SMR600_062

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a front facing child restraintsystem, the child should sit in a backseat on a booster seat and wear alap/shoulder belt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

Protecting Larger Children


Allowing a child age 12 orunder to sit in front can resultin injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbaginflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use abooster seat if needed, havethe child sit up properly andwear the seat belt properly.

Leaning over the front doorcan result in serious injury ordeath if the side airbaginflates.

Always sit upright with theirback against the seat-back.

06/12/06 10:36:34 32SMR600_063

CONTINUED

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a front

facing child restraint system shouldride in a back seat and use a boosterseat until the lap/shoulder belt fitsthem properly without the booster.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.



Using a Booster SeatChecking Seat Belt Fit

61

06/12/06 10:36:44 32SMR600_064

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

For EU countries, refer to pagefor the booster seat placement.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsapproved safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A back-rest may be available for aspecific booster seat. Install theback-rest to the booster seat andadjust it to the vehicle seat accordingto the booster seat maker’sinstructions. Make sure the seat beltis properly routed through the guideat the shoulder of the back-rest andthe belt does not touch and cross thechild’s neck (see page ).

44

47

17



GUIDE

06/12/06 10:36:51 32SMR600_065

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

If your vehicle is equipped with theside airbag, it also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

It is recommended that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

Remind the child not to leantoward the door.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

17 60



When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

63

06/12/06 10:37:03 32SMR600_066

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.



Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.


06/12/06 10:37:09 32SMR600_067

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

With the tailgate open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windows,and set the heating and ventilationsystem/climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand ventilation system/climatecontrol system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and evenkill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

06/12/06 10:37:17 32SMR600_068

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your dealer for areplacement.

The label shown below is attached tothe back of the bonnet.

Safety Labels


Follow service manualinstructions carefully

Safety alert symbol

SRS Airbag

SRS Airbag

RADIATOR CAP DANGER LABEL

BATTERY DANGER LABEL

SRS AIRBAG

SIDE AIRBAG

CHILD SAFETY

EXPANSION TANK CAP DANGER LABEL

(Petrol models)

(Diesel models)

CHILD SAFETY/SRS AIRBAG

(Left-hand drive type)

CHILD SAFETY/SRS AIRBAG

(Right-hand drive type)

06/12/06 10:37:26 32SMR600_069

Symbols on top of theengine under the engine cover are toremind you to follow the servicemanual instructions. When replacingthe injectors, your authorized dealershould perform this work. Contactyour dealer.

The label shown below is attached toeach doorjamb.

Safety Labels


On Diesel models

67

Safety alert symbol

Follow owner’ s manualinstructions carefully

Side Airbag

06/12/06 10:37:34 32SMR600_070

68

06/12/06 10:37:37 32SMR600_071

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 70............................Instrument Panel . 72

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 76.............................................Gauges . 84

....mph to km/h Change Button . 85...............................Speedometer . 86

.................................Tachometer . 86...................Temperature Gauge . 86

..................................Fuel Gauge . 86..............................REV Indicator . 87.............................ECO Indicator . 87

.........................i-VTEC Indicator . 88..............Multi-information Display . 89

Controls Near the Steering.........................................Wheel . 135

Windscreen Wipers and.....................................Washers . 137

.........Turn Signal and Headlights . 140..........Front and Rear Fog Lights . 142

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 144...............Hazard Warning Button . 145...............Rear Window Demister . 145

.......................Headlight Adjuster . 146......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 147

.............................Keys and Locks . 148......................Immobilizer System . 149

..............................Ignition Switch . 149....................................Door Locks . 151

....................Power Door Locks . 151...........................Super Locking . 153

.....................Remote Transmitter . 154..........................................Tailgate . 158

...............................................Seats . 160...........Front Seat Adjustments . 160

Driver’s Seat Height............................Adjustment . 162

........................Head Restraints . 162....................................Armrests . 163

.............Folding the Rear Seats . 164..................................Seat Heaters . 166

....................Luggage Area Cover . 167............................Power Windows . 168

......................................Sunshades . 170...........................................Mirrors . 172

...............................Parking Brake . 174.........Interior Convenience Items . 175

..................................Glove Box . 176.........................Centre Console . 177

.....................Beverage Holders . 178.........Accessory Power Socket . 179

..................................Coat Hook . 179...................................Sun Visor . 180

............................Vanity Mirror . 180........Under-floor Storage Area . 180

...........................Centre Pocket . 182......................Cigarette Lighter . 182

.......................................Ashtray . 183...............................Interior Lights . 183

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 69

06/12/06 10:37:41 32SMR600_072

＊

＊

＊

: If equipped

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls70



MIRROR CONTROLS


DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY


CLOCK



(P.12, 28)

(P.12, 28)

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG



MANUAL TRANSMISSIONi-SHIFT

AUDIO SYSTEMSUNSHADE SWITCH

(P.89)

(P.172)

(P.151)

(P.168)

(P.299)

(P.301) (P.326)(P.322)

(P.145)

(P.212)(P.270)(P.170)(P.189, 195)

06/12/06 10:37:48 32SMR600_073

＊

＊

＊: If equipped

Control Locations



DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG



CLOCK MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

MIRROR CONTROLS

MANUAL TRANSMISSION



(P.12, 28)

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG



i-SHIFT BONNET RELEASE HANDLE

SUNSHADESWITCH

AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.12, 28)

(P.270)

(P.145)

(P.212)

(P.326)(P.322)

(P.301)

(P.299)

(P.168)

(P.151)

(P.172)

(P.89)(P.170)

(P.189, 195)

06/12/06 10:37:55 32SMR600_074

Since the indicators vary between models, some indicators are not on your vehicle.

Instrument Panel (Petrol models)


With manual transmission

72

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

FRONT FOG LIGHTINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWERSTEERING (EPS)INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

REAR FOG LIGHTINDICATOR

(P.82)

(P.78)

(P.80)

(P.80)

(P.82)

(P.83)

(P.80)

(P.83)

(P.81)

(P.79)

(P.81)

(P.79)

(P.81)

(P.81)

(P.78)

(P.76)

(P.76, 467)

(P.77, 464)

(P.77, 466)

(P.77, 470)

06/12/06 10:38:03 32SMR600_075




With i-SHIFT

73

LOW FUEL INDICATOR







LIGHTS ON INDICATOR


HIGH BEAM INDICATOR






(P.79)

(P.81)

(P.81)

(P.83)

(P.80)

(P.83)

(P.82)

(P.78)

(P.82)


(P.80)

(P.80)

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR(P.79)

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR(P.81)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR(P.81)i-SHIFT SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.78)

(P.76)

(P.76, 467)

(P.79, 336)

(P.77, 464)

(P.77, 466)

(P.77, 470)

(P.326)

06/12/06 10:38:12 32SMR600_076




Type-R

74

LOW FUEL INDICATOR







LIGHTS ON INDICATOR


HIGH BEAM INDICATOR






(P.79)

(P.81)

(P.81)

(P.83)

(P.80)

(P.83)

(P.82)

(P.78)

(P.82)


(P.80)

(P.80)

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR(P.79)

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR(P.81)

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR(P.81)

(P.78)

(P.76)


(P.76, 467)

(P.77, 464)

(P.77, 466)

(P.77, 470)

06/12/06 10:38:20 32SMR600_077


Instrument Panel (Diesel models)



HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR



GLOW PLUGS INDICATOR


CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR


LOW FUEL INDICATOR



MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP




CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR




(P.82)

(P.78)

(P.80)

(P.82)

(P.80)

(P.83)

(P.80)

(P.83)

(P.81)

(P.81)

(P.79)

(P.81)

(P.79)

(P.81)

(P.77)

(P.78)

(P.76)

(P.76, 468)

(P.77, 464)

(P.77, 466)

(P.77, 470)

06/12/06 10:38:28 32SMR600_078

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

See page on petrol models andpage on diesel models.

This indicator will also come onwhen you restart the engine afteryour vehicle has run out of fuel (seepage ).

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’(for a driver)/‘‘ ’’ (for a frontpassenger), or this symbol with a‘‘FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT’’ or‘‘FASTEN YOUR PASSENGER’SSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display to remind youand your passengers to fasten yourseat belts.

The seat belt system also monitorsthe seat belt use of all rear seatingpositions according to each seat beltbuckle latch function. The multi-information display will show you theseat belt use on the rear seat (seepage ).

22467

468

104

421

98

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

On Diesel models only

Instrument Panel Indicators


06/12/06 10:38:40 32SMR600_079

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ’’or this symbol with an ‘‘OILPRESSURE LOW’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .


This indicator comes on for a fewseconds (several seconds in coldweather or at high altitudes) whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. When the engine iscold, wait for the indicator to go offbefore starting the engine.

If you experience any of thefollowing symptoms, there may be aproblem with the water temperaturesensor of the fuel system. Have yourvehicle inspected by your dealer.

This indicator goes out faster thannormal when the outsidetemperature is very low.

It is hard to start the engine.

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tyres.

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

1.464

104

466

105

100

CONTINUED

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Glow Plugs Indicator(Diesel models only)

Parking Brake andBrake System Indicator



06/12/06 10:38:54 32SMR600_080

If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .


This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will go off if youhave inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

2.

470

104 339

105

149

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator



06/12/06 10:39:03 32SMR600_081

Only on vehicles with i-SHIFTThis indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, or if it does not come on whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, there is a problemwith the i-SHIFT control system.Avoid rapid acceleration, frequentlyshifting, and driving at high speed,and have the vehicle checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

When this indicator comes on, youwill hear a beep as a reminder. Youwill also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ orthis symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator also comes on whiledriving if the clutch system isoverheating. It will go off when theclutch system temperature comesdown. If this indicator goes off whiledriving to your dealer, you cancontinue driving normally. For moreinformation of the i-SHIFT, see page

.

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message in the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel to seethe message (see page ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, side curtain airbags, orautomatic seat belt tensioners. Formore information, see page .

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

30

106

326

90

i-SHIFT (AutomatedManual Transmission)System Indicator

System MessageIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator



79

06/12/06 10:39:15 32SMR600_082

If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will stay on,but should go off after driving ashort distance. If it does not go off,or comes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be turned off,making the vehicle harder to steer.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the rear fog light. See page

for information on operating therear fog light.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the front fog lights. See page

for information on operating thefront fog lights.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering to avoid the damage fromoverheating of the steering gear box.

106

142

143



Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

Rear Fog Light Indicator

Front Fog LightIndicator(For some types)

80

06/12/06 10:39:25 32SMR600_083

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

For more information, see page .

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

1.

2.

3.

276

276

107

341

341

107

341

If equipped

If equipped



Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

81

06/12/06 10:39:39 32SMR600_084

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignalling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle will flash.

Your vehicle has the one-push turnsignal feature to signal a lane changeeasily (see page ).

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door without the key inthe ignition switch.

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with a‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator also comes on whenthe lights are turned onautomatically with the light switch inthe AUTO position.

You will see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the automaticheadlight control system.

395

140

140

101

On vehicles with automatic lighting onfeature



Turn Signal and Hazard WarningIndicators

High Beam Indicator

Lights On Indicator

82

06/12/06 10:39:49 32SMR600_085

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 7.5 of fuel remaining in thetank before the needle reaches 0.There is a small reserve of fuelremaining in the tank when theneedle reaches 0.

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

You will also see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol with‘‘FUEL LOW’’ (petrol models) or‘‘DIESEL FUEL LOW’’ (dieselmodels) message on the multi-information display.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 8.1 of fuel remaining in thetank before the needle reaches 0.There is a small reserve of fuelremaining in the tank when theneedle reaches 0.

Refer toon page if your vehicle runs outof fuel.

273 421

On diesel models

Type-R model



Security System Indicator(For some types)

Low Fuel Indicator

Priming the Fuel System

83


LOW FUEL INDICATOR

06/12/06 10:39:59 32SMR600_086

Gauges


TACHOMETER

SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATUREGAUGE


REV INDICATOR ECO INDICATOR

Petrol model with manual transmission is shown.

FUELGAUGE

TEMPERATUREGAUGE


REV INDICATOR

FUELGAUGE

i-VTECINDICATOR

TACHOMETER

Type-R model

SPEEDOMETER

06/12/06 10:40:05 32SMR600_087

→ →

Press and hold the mph to km/hchange button until you hear a beep.The speedometer and theinformation on the multi-informationdisplay (trip meter, odometer,current fuel mileage, estimateddistance, average speed, and averagefuel economy readings) switchbetween kilometers per hour andmiles per hour.

You will see the mph to km/hchange indicator on the multi-information display.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is displayed.

The mph is set as the default settingwhen the vehicle leaves the factory.Even if you change this setting to thekm/h display, the system returns tothe default setting if your vehicle’sbattery is disconnected or goes dead.

The km/h is set as the defaultsetting when the vehicle leaves thefactory. Even if you change thissetting to the mph display, thesystem returns to the default settingif your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead.On the right-hand drive models only

On some types

Gauges


mph to km/h Change Button

85

km/h mph mph km/h

06/12/06 10:40:12 32SMR600_088

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire,damaging the catalytic converter.

The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on or the glow plugs indicatorwill blink when you restart theengine after your vehicle has run outof fuel.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, such asvery hot weather or a long period ofuphill driving, the pointer may riseinto the upper half of the gauge. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pull insafely to the side of the road. Turn topage on petrol models and page

on diesel models for instructionsand precautions on checking theengine cooling system.

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles per hour(mph) depending on the type.

On the right-hand drive models, youcan switch the display betweenkm/h and mph.

You can set the vehicle speed alarm.For more information, see page .

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

112460

462

On petrol models only

On diesel models only

Gauges


Fuel GaugeTemperature GaugeSpeedometer

Tachometer

86

06/12/06 10:40:22 32SMR600_089

This indicator shows the current fuelmileage and the fuel economy whiledriving. When you see all sixindicators come on, it indicates thatthe engine is operating in its mosteconomical range. No indicatorcomes on when your vehicle is usingextra fuel.

When you select the automaticdriving mode, the REV indictor turnsoff. For more information, see page

.

This indicator shows you thetachometer reading approaching tothe red zone while driving. Whenyou see all six indicators come on, itindicates that the tachometerreading reaches the red zone.

To protect engine damage, neverdrive with the tachometer reading inthe red zone.

326

On vehicles with i-SHIFTExcept Type-R

Gauges


ECO IndicatorREV Indicator

87

ECO INDICATORREV INDICATOR

06/12/06 10:40:30 32SMR600_090

While the vehicle is moving, thei-VTEC switches the low RPM camsto the high RPM cams and controlsvalve timing, valve lift, and so on bymonitoring the engine load and rpm.

The i-VTEC indicator works as areminder when the low RPM camsare changed to the high RPM cams.To activate this indicator toautomatically turn on when the i-VTEC system switches to the highRPM cams, you need to customizethe setting. The indicator’s defaultsetting is OFF. To customize the i-VTEC indicator, see page .129

Type-R Model

Gauges


i-VTEC Indicator

88

i-VTEC INDICATOR

06/12/06 10:40:35 32SMR600_091

You can select the displayedlanguage and also customize somevehicle control settings to your likingwith the multi-information displayand the two buttons on the steeringwheel (see page ).

The multi-information display in thetachometer on the instrument paneldisplays various information andsymbols/messages when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position.Some of the indicators/messageshelp you operate your vehicle moreeffectively. Others keep you awareof the vehicle’s condition forcontinued trouble-free driving.

There are two types of symbols/messages: normal display symbols/messages and system warningsymbols/messages.

The multi-information displayconsists of an upper segment and alower segment. Each segment candisplay two lines of messages.

In normal display mode, the uppersegment displays the trip computer,and the lower segment displays theodometer, trip meter, and outsidetemperature.

90

CONTINUED

Normal Display Symbols/Messages

Multi-Information Display


UPPER SEGMENT UPPER SEGMENT

‘‘mph’’ selected‘‘km/h’’ selected LOWER SEGMENTLOWER SEGMENT

06/12/06 10:40:43 32SMR600_092

If there is any system warning,system warning symbol(s) will beshown on the multi-informationdisplay following the current fuelmileage display. The system warningsymbol/message that has thehighest priority will be displayed firstwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

In normal display mode, the upperdisplay shows the current fuelmileage when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position (seepage ). Each time you press theINFO button, the trip computerchanges from the current fuelmileage to the estimated distance, tothe elapsed time, to the averagespeed, to the average fuel mileage, tothe rear seat belt use and then to no

display as shown on the next page.

91



SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFOBUTTON

On vehicles with cruise control

SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFO BUTTON

On vehicles without cruise control

06/12/06 10:40:49 32SMR600_093

CONTINUED




Right-hand drive typemph is selected.

Except Type-R

Type-R

Except Type-R

Type-R

06/12/06 10:40:54 32SMR600_094

The lower segment always showsthe odometer, trip meter and theoutside temperature in the normaldisplay mode.

The average fuel mileage is updatedonce per 10 seconds. When you reseta trip meter, the average fuelmileage for that trip meter alsoresets. To reset the values in the tripcomputer, press and hold the SEL/RESET button until the numberresets to ‘‘0.0.’’

: Your vehicle’s average fuelmileage since you last reset the tripcomputer B.

: Your vehicle’s average fuelmileage since you last reset the tripcomputer A.

: The average speed you aretravelling is displayed in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles per hour(mph) depending on the displaymode you selected.

: The time travelled sinceyou last turned the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

Indicators in the trip computer show:

This distance is estimated from thefuel economy you have achievedover the last few kilometers (miles),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic condition, etc.

: The estimated distance youcan travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank.

The display may show a current fuelmileage reading higher than innormal driving while the particulatematter (PM) is burnt and removedfrom the diesel particulate filter(DPF). For more information, seepage .

: Your vehicle’s current fuelmileage in miles per hour and mpg.

: Your vehicle’s current fuelmileage in kilometers per hour andL/100 km.

495

On diesel models with DPF



TRIP METER

ODOMETER

OUTSIDE TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

06/12/06 10:41:08 32SMR600_095

±The odometer shows the totalnumber of kilometers or miles yourvehicle has been driven.

This meter shows the number ofkilometers or miles driven since youlast reset it.

There are two trip meters: trip A andtrip B. To switch the display betweenthem, press the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly. When you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, what you last selected isdisplayed.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 30 km/h (19 mph).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(0°C) could mean that ice is formingon the road surface. You will also seea caution symbol on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in degrees Centigrade.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit by up to 3°C warmer or cooler(see page ).

‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ will bedisplayed when the average fuelmileage is selected in the uppersegment, depending on which tripmeter (trip A or trip B) is displayedin the lower segment.

120

102

Odometer

Trip Meter

Outside Temperature Indicator



06/12/06 10:41:20 32SMR600_096

These symbols/messages alsotrigger the appropriate indicator(s)on the instrument panel and causethe system message indicator tocome on. The system messageindicator does not go off until theproblem(s) are corrected.

The following pages describe eachsystem warning symbol/messagethat can be displayed. Here is a list ofall messages:

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more symbols/messages. Most of the symbols/messages are displayed for about 5seconds, and then the currentdisplay returns. Some symbols/messages stay on until the problemis corrected.

When your vehicle is new, the multi-information display shows thesystem warning symbols without themessage. This is the default settingwhen the vehicle leaves the factory.You can customize this setting to seethe system warning symbols withmessages (see page ). Somesymbols such as the low outsidetemperature, rear seat belt reminderindicator, etc., do not have amessage.

In this section, the system symbolwith message is used in almost allexamples, but the symbol(s) are thesame for the default setting.

118

System Warning Symbols




Except Type-R model is shown.

06/12/06 10:41:27 32SMR600_097

CONTINUED

See pages104, 467 and

468.

See pages104 and 464.













See pages22 and 97.



06/12/06 10:41:38 32SMR600_098

See pages22 and 97.

See pages22 and 98.

See page99.












Petrolmodels

Dieselmodels



Except Type-R Type-R

06/12/06 10:41:49 32SMR600_099

Fasten Seat Belt Fasten Passenger Seat Belt

The multi-information display alsointerrupts the current display andshows this symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or thissymbol with a ‘‘FASTENPASSENGER SEAT BELT’’ messageif a front seat passenger does notfasten their seat belt while driving.This symbol/message remainsdisplayed if a passenger ignores itand does not wear the seat belt whilethe vehicle is moving.

In addition to the seat belt reminderindicator in the instrument panel, thecurrent display is interrupted and themulti-information display shows thissymbol ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol witha ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ messageif you do not fasten your seat beltwhile driving. This symbol/messageremains displayed if you ignore itand do not wear your seat belt whilethe vehicle is moving.

For more information of the seat beltreminder indicator, see page .22



06/12/06 10:41:57 32SMR600_100

Rear Seat Belt Use Monitor

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the uppersegment of the multi-informationdisplay shows the rear seat belt use.

This monitor goes off after about 30seconds. It will also go off when youchange the display by pressing thesystem message button on thesteering wheel.

The seat belt system detects anyseat belt use of all three or two(Type-R model) rear seat seatingpositions according to each seat beltbuckle latch function. The systemshows you how many rear seat beltsare being used and reminds you andyour passengers to fasten their seatbelts. According to the rear seat beltuse (1 through 3 or 1 through 2), youwill see the indicator(s) highlightedon the right side of the upper

segment.



Seat belts in right and centrepositions are used.



Seat belt in right positions is used.

06/12/06 10:42:05 32SMR600_101

Pressing the INFO button on thesteering wheel momentarily changesthe display, but it will come backafter about 5 seconds.

Door and Tailgate Open

If the tailgate or either door(s) is notclosed tightly, this monitor displayindicates you which door or thetailgate is not closed tightly, andreminds you to close the tailgate orthe door(s) before you start driving.This display continues until youclose the door(s) and the tailgate.

While driving, you can also confirmthe rear seat belt use. Press andrelease the INFO button ( )repeatedly to change the display.

If the system cannot detect the seatbelt use, you will see three or two(Type-R model) dashes. Turn theignition switch to the LOCK (0)position to reset the system. If thishappens, the SRS indicator alsocomes on. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer (see page

).30




06/12/06 10:42:12 32SMR600_102

Release Parking Brake Ignition Key

If you start driving without releasingthe parking brake, the currentdisplay is interrupted and the multi-information display shows thissymbol, or this symbol with a‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’message. This symbol/messagecontinues, and a chime sounds, untilyou release the parking brake.

If you leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door, you will see thissymbol, or this symbol with/a‘‘IGNITION KEY’’ message on thedisplay and hear a reminder beeper.

Brake Fluid Low

If the brake fluid level is at or belowthe MIN mark on the side of thebrake fluid reservoir in the enginecompartment, you will see thissymbol, or this symbol with a‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message. Ifyou see this message, have the brakesystem checked by your dealer (seepage ).378



06/12/06 10:42:20 32SMR600_103

If the level of the fuel in the tankgets low, you will see this symbol, orthis symbol with a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’message on the display, and youmust refuel soon. The low fuelindicator in the instrument panel willalso come on (see page ).

If the level of the fuel in the tankgets low, you will see this symbol, orthis symbol with a ‘‘DIESEL FUELLOW’’ message on the display, andyou must refuel soon. The low fuelindicator in the instrument panel willalso come on (see page ).

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position without turning off theheadlights or position lights, andopen the driver’s door, you will seethis symbol, or this symbol with a‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message onthe display. The lights on indicator inthe instrument panel also comes onand stays on.

Fuel Low Diesel Fuel Low Headlights On

8383

On petrol models On diesel models



06/12/06 10:42:28 32SMR600_104

If you set the speed alarm function inthe custom settings, you will see thisindicator and hear a beep when thevehicle speed reaches the set speed.You can set two different speeds forthe alarm. For more information toset the speed alarm, see page .

If the outside temperature is verylow (near freezing) and there is arisk that the road surface is iced over,you will see this symbol on the multi-function display. For moreinformation of the outsidetemperature indicator, see page .

Speed Alarm Low Outside Temperature

112 93



Alarm at vehicle speed 80 km/h is set.

06/12/06 10:42:34 32SMR600_105

The following symbols/messagesindicate various problems in yourvehicle’s systems.

Check Engine Oil Level

If this symbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’message comes on on the multi-information display when the engineis running, the engine oil level is low.You will also hear a beep with thissymbol/message on. You shouldcheck the oil level and add engine oil.For more information, see page .

If you ignore the oil level symbol/message and keep driving with thissymbol/message on, you canseriously damage the engine.You will also hear a beep when the

symbol or the symbol with amessage is displayed on the multi-information display at the first time.

465

System Warnings



06/12/06 10:42:40 32SMR600_106

Oil Pressure Low Check System (Engine) Check System (Brake)

If the engine oil is very low or haslost pressure, you will see thissymbol or this symbol with an ‘‘OILPRESSURE LOW’’ message on themulti-information display. You willalso see the low oil pressureindicator in the instrument panelflashing or staying on. If you see thissymbol/message, you should takeimmediate action since seriousengine damage is possible. Followthe procedure on page .

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display, itmeans one of the engine’s emissionssystems may have a problem. Haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer(see page on petrol models andpage on diesel models).

If there is a problem with the brakesystem, you will see this symbol orthis symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. The parkingbrake and brake system indicator inthe instrument panel will also comeon. For more information, see page

.

464

467468

470



06/12/06 10:42:49 32SMR600_107

Check System (Charging System) Check System (Airbag System)

If there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system (ABS), you willsee this symbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. Have yourvehicle checked by a dealer (seepage ).

Check System (ABS System)

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display, itmeans the battery is not beingcharged. For more information, seepage .

If there is a problem with your frontairbags, side airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, or side curtainairbags, you will see this symbol orthis symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. Take yourvehicle to a dealer as soon aspossible (see page ).30

78466



06/12/06 10:42:56 32SMR600_108

Check System (i-SHIFT) Check System (EPS)

If there is a problem with the electricpower steering (EPS) system, youwill see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ on themulti-information display. The EPSsystem indicator in the instrumentpanel will also come on. If you seethis symbol/message, have the EPSsystem checked by your dealer. Formore information, see page .

If there is a problem with thei-SHIFT system, you will see thissymbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. Thei-SHIFT system indicator on theinstrument panel will also come onand you will hear a beep. If you seethis symbol/message, avoid rapidacceleration, frequently shifting, and

driving at high speed, and have thevehicle checked by your dealer assoon as possible. For moreinformation, see page .

This symbol/message and thei-SHIFT system indicator also comeon while driving if the clutch systemis overheating. They will go off whenthe clutch system temperaturecomes down. If they go off whiledriving to your dealer, you cancontinue driving normally.

80

336

On vehicles with i-SHIFT (automatedmanual transmission)



06/12/06 10:43:04 32SMR600_109

Check System (VSA)

If there is a problem with the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, youwill see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display. TheVSA system and VSA activationindicators in the instrument panelwill also come on. If you see thissymbol/message, have the VSAsystem checked by your dealer. Formore information, see page .

Check System (Engine Oil LevelSensor)

Check System (PGM-FI)

If there is a problem with the engineoil level sensor system, you will seethis symbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. If youignore this symbol/message andcontinue driving, the system will beseriously damaged. For moreinformation, see page .

If there is a problem with the enginecontrol system, you will see thissymbol or this symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. If youignore this symbol/message andcontinue driving, the engine controlsystem will be seriously damaged.For more information, see page .

341466

469



06/12/06 10:43:11 32SMR600_110

DPF (Regeneration Required)

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘DPF REGENERATIONREQUIRED’’ message on the multi-information display while the engineis running, it means the dieselparticulate filter (DPF) should beregenerated to remove theaccumulated particulate matter (PM).For more information on the DPFsystem, see page .

DPF (Check System)

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information displaywhile the engine is running, it meansthe diesel particulate filter (DPF) isclogged with accumulatedparticulate matter (PM) and itshould be checked, then repaired orreplace. Take your vehicle to aHonda dealer as soon as possible.

If you ignore this symbol/messageand continue driving, the DPF andyour vehicle’s emission controlsystems will be seriously damaged.For more information on the DPFsystem, see page .

495

496

Diesel models with DPF (DieselParticulate Filter)

Diesel models with DPF (DieselParticulate Filter)



06/12/06 10:43:19 32SMR600_111

Water In Fuel Filter Check System (AutomaticHeadlights On)

If this symbol or this symbol with a‘‘WATER IN FUEL FILTER’’ showson the multi-information display,water stays in the fuel system whichmay cause damage to the fuelinjection system. Contact your dealeras soon as possible and have the fuelfilter checked to drain off water.

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display, itmeans there is a problem with theautomatic headlights on controlsystem. If you see this symbol/message, have the vehicle checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Diesel models onlyOn vehicles with automatic lightingfeature



06/12/06 10:43:25 32SMR600_112

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

±

＊＊＊＊

You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to suit your needs. The table shows the settings you cancustomize.

Menu Item DescriptionSets the speed alarm on and changes the alarm speedsetting.

Sets the speed alarm on.

Switches warning message to be displayed or not.Changes the outside temperature reading above or belowits current reading.Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy toreset when you refuel.Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.Changes the measurement standard in the trip computer.Switches indicator to be displayed or not.Switches indicator to be displayed or not.Switches indicator to be displayed or not.Changes the language used in the display.

Resets all customized settings to the factory default.

SPEED ALARM 1(ON/OFF, Setting)SPEED ALARM 2(ON/OFF, Setting)SPEED ALARM 1(ON/OFF)SPEED ALARM 2(ON/OFF)

ADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAYTRIP A RESETWITH REFUEL

DISPLAY UNITREV. INDICATORECO. INDICATORi-VTEC. INDICATOR

Setting OptionON/OFFover 5 km/h (mph)with 5 km/h (mph) steps

ON/OFF

ON/OFFup to 3°C0°CON/OFF

IGN OFF , TRIP A, TRIP BAUTO , KM, MILESON /OFFON /OFFON/OFF

CANCELOK

Group SetupSPEED ALARM(P.111)

CHG SETTING(P.117)

LANGUAGE(P.111)DEFAULT ALL(P.111)

Page

112

115

118120

121

123124126127129130

132

Factory default settingOnly on the right-hand drive typeSetting is available while driving 2 :1 : 3 : 4 : Type-R

1

1

2

4

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

WARNING MESSAGE

ELAPSED TIME RESET

ENGLISH , ITALIAN, SPANISH,GERMAN, FRENCH, PORTUGUESE

Customized Settings



06/12/06 10:43:33 32SMR600_113

Each time you press the INFObutton, the display switches from‘‘SPEED ALARM’’, ‘‘CHGSETTING’’, ‘‘LANGUAGE’’,‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’, ‘‘EXIT’’, and thenback to ‘‘SPEED ALARM’’ as shownabove.

SPEED ALARM: To set the speedalarm (see page ).

CHG SETTING: To changevehicle control settings (see page

).

LANGUAGE: To select language(see page ).

DEFAULT ALL: To return to thedefault settings (see page ).

To enter the customizing mode, thevehicle must be stopped with theignition switch in the ON (II)position and the parking brake is set.(Exceptionally, this condition is notapplied on some speed alarmsettings.) Press and hold the INFObutton on the steering wheel forabout 3 seconds while the multi-information display is in its normaldisplay. Here are the settings youcan customize.

130

112

117

132CONTINUED



06/12/06 10:43:41 32SMR600_114

If you set the alarm to the specifiedvehicle speed while driving, select‘‘SPEED ALARM,’’ and refer to page

. Exceptionally, you can alsoselect the specified speed alarmwhile driving.

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select ‘‘CHGSETTING,’’ and follow theinstructions on page .

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ asdescribed on page .

If you do not select any settings onthe display after you press the INFObutton and the setting menu isdisplayed, the customizing modedisplay will return to the normaldisplay after about 10 seconds.

If you try to start driving whilecustomizing the settings, you will see‘‘MUST STOP AND PARK TOCHANGE SETTINGS’’ on thedisplay and the customizing will becancelled.

Customizing is also cancelled, if youturn the ignition switch out of theON (II) position.

Use the INFO button ( ) on thesteering wheel to see and scrollthrough the settings, and the SEL/RESET button to enter yourselections.

You can access different alarmfunctions when the vehicle isstopped or while driving. Whiledriving, you can select either of thetwo speed alarm settings. When yourvehicle is stopped, you can customizethe setting speed to your preference.

115

117

132

Speed Alarm



06/12/06 10:43:49 32SMR600_115

To set the speed alarm while the vehicleis stopped:

Press and hold the INFO button toenter the customizing mode, thenpress and release the INFO buttonrepeatedly to select ‘‘SPEEDALARM.’’ While the multi-information display is showing‘‘SPEED ALARM,’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The display changesto the setting mode.

Speed setting 1: You can set thealarm on or off, and adjust thesetting speeds above or below50 km/h (30 mph).

Speed setting 2: You can set thealarm on or off, and adjust thesetting speeds above or below80 km/h (50 mph).

Each time you press and release theINFO button ( ), the selectedicon is changed from set 1, to 50km/h (30 mph), and to set 2, to 80km/h (50 mph). Then press theINFO button again to exit.On the left-hand drive type, you can

set the speed alarm in km/h. On theright-hand drive type, you can set thespeed alarm in km/h or mphaccording to the selectedspeedometer display. The two speedselections and the on/off settingicons are displayed.

CONTINUED



Speed setting 1 off is selected.

06/12/06 10:43:57 32SMR600_116

＋－

Select either of the setting modes (1or 2), then select on or off bypressing the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly.

To adjust the setting speed, selecteither of the setting speeds, thenpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes to thespeed setting screen.

The displayed number is the currentspeed setting. Select either the or

icon by pressing the INFO buttonrepeatedly, then press the SEL/RESET button to change the settingvalue.



Alarm onAlarm off

06/12/06 10:44:05 32SMR600_117

Each time you press the SEL/RESET button, the setting speedincreases or decreases by 5 km/h(mph). You can set the speed valuesover 5 km/h (5 mph) with 5 km/h(mph) steps. Always follow theposted speed limit and never drivefaster than is safe for the trafficconditions.

To enter your selection, select theSET icon by pressing the INFObutton, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button.

After your selection, press andrelease the INFO button to move tothe exit mode. Press the SEL/RESET button to enter your setting.If you press the INFO button, thedisplay goes back to the settingmode. Repeat the setup.

To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode shown above bypressing the INFO button repeatedly,then press the SEL/RESET button.The display goes back to the normaldisplay.

Press the INFO button for about 1second to switch the display. You willsee the speed alarm settings on themulti-information display.

To select the alarm speed while driving:

CONTINUED



06/12/06 10:44:12 32SMR600_118

If you do not press any button, thedisplay returns to the normal displayafter about 10 seconds.

After pressing the SEL/RESETbutton, the display shows yoursetting for a few seconds, then goesback to the normal display.

After your selection, press andrelease the INFO button to move tothe exit mode. Press the SEL/RESET button to enter your setting.If you press the INFO button, thedisplay goes back to the settingmode. Repeat the setup.

Select the desired setting speed,then press the SEL/RESET button.Each time you press the SEL/RESET button, the selected speedicon switches between on and off.

According to the selected display,you can select the alarm speedbetween the two setting speeds:50 km/h and 80 km/h in km/h mode,or 30 mph and 50 mph in mph mode.Each time you press and release theINFO button, the selected icon ischanged between the setting speedsand the exit icon.



Alarm off Alarm onAlarm on

06/12/06 10:44:19 32SMR600_119

＋－

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to suit yourneeds. The following items are thesettings you can customize.

WARNING MESSAGE: Thewarning message is displayed withthe symbol or not (see page ).

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY: The outsidetemperature indicator value isadjustable up to or 3°C (seepage ).

TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL:Average fuel mileage for tripmeter A can be reset afterrefueling (see page ).

ELAPSED TIME RESET: Theelapsed time can be reset whenyou turn the ignition switch to theOFF (0) position or when youreset the trip meter A or B (seepage ).

DISPLAY UNIT: Measurements inthe trip computer can be selected;auto, km or miles (see page ).This function is available on theright-hand drive type only.

REV. INDICATOR: Rev indicatorcan be turned on or off (see page

).

ECO. INDICATOR: ECO indicatorcan be turned on or off (see page

).

i-VTEC. INDICATOR: i-VTECindicator can be turned on or off(see page ).

118

120

121

123

124

126

127

129

CONTINUED

Change Setting



Except Type-R

Type-R

06/12/06 10:44:30 32SMR600_120

Press and hold the INFO button toenter the customizing mode, thenpress and release the INFO buttonrepeatedly to select ‘‘CHG SETTING.’’While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘CHG SETTING,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting mode.

Press and release the INFO buttonrepeatedly until you see the setupyou want to customize, and press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection. Each time you press theINFO button, the display changes asshown. To customize each setting,follow the procedures described onthe following pages.

To exit the customizing mode afteryour selection, select the exit modeshown above by pressing the INFObutton repeatedly, then press theSEL/RESET button. The display willreturn to the normal display.

You can see message(s) with thesystem warning symbol on the multi-information display. While the multi-information display is showing‘‘WARNING MESSAGE,’’ press theSEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.

Warning Message



06/12/06 10:44:37 32SMR600_121

You can select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’. Eachtime you press the INFO button, theselected mode switches between onand off. Enter your selection bypressing the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP ON’’ for a few seconds,then goes back to the ‘‘CHGSETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/RESET button, then press the INFObutton repeatedly to select anothercustomizing mode.If you fail to enter your selection,you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on thedisplay for a few seconds. Thedisplay returns to the setting mode.

Repeat the setup.

To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode by pressing the INFObutton repeatedly, then press theSEL/RESET button (see page ).The display goes back to the‘‘WARNING MESSAGE’’ display.To return to the normal display,select the display, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

118

CONTINUED



06/12/06 10:44:45 32SMR600_122

＋－

＋＋＋－－－

If you find that the temperaturereading is always a few degreesbelow or above the actualtemperature, adjust it as describedon the following columns.

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAY,’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The display changesto the setting display.

The highlighted number is thecurrent adjustment above or belowthe outside temperature. Selecteither or icon by pressing theINFO button repeatedly then pressthe SEL/RESET button to changethe setting value. You can select thevalue between 0, 1, 2, 3, and 0,

1, 2, 3. To enter your selection,select the SET icon by pressing theINFO button, then press the SEL/RESET button.

Outside Temperature DisplayAdjustment



06/12/06 10:44:51 32SMR600_123

±

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on thedisplay for a few seconds. Thedisplay returns to the setting mode.Repeat the setup.

To cause the trip meter A and theaverage fuel mileage for trip A toreset every time you refuel yourvehicle, adjust it as described asfollows.

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘TRIP A RESET WITHREFUEL,’’ press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes to thesetting display.

To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode by pressing the INFObutton repeatedly, then press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to the normal display.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP °C’’ for a few seconds,then goes back to the ‘‘CHGSETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/RESET button, then press the INFObutton repeatedly to select anothercustomizing mode.

CONTINUED

Trip A Reset With Refuel



06/12/06 10:44:58 32SMR600_124


To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode by pressing the INFObutton repeatedly, then press theSEL/RESET button. The display willreturn to the normal display.


When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP ON’’ for a few seconds,then goes back to the ‘‘CHGSETTING’’ display. Press the SEL/RESET button, then press the INFObutton repeatedly to select anothercustomizing mode.



06/12/06 10:45:04 32SMR600_125

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘ELAPSED TIMERESET,’’ press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes to thesetting display.

TRIP A: The elapsed time is resetwhen you reset the trip meter A.

TRIP B: The elapsed time is resetwhen you reset the trip meter B.

You can select ‘‘IGN OFF,’’‘‘TRIP A,’’ or ‘‘TRIP B’’. Each timeyou press the INFO button, theselected mode switches betweenthem. Enter your selection bypressing the SEL/RESET button.

To cause the elapsed time to resetevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position orreset the trip meter A or B, adjust itas described as follows.

IGN OFF: The elapsed time is resetwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position.

CONTINUED

Elapsed Time Reset



06/12/06 10:45:12 32SMR600_126


You can select the measurementstandard in the trip computer asdescribed as follows. There are threeselectable modes; AUTO, KM andMILES.


When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows theappropriate setting; ‘‘SETTING IGNOFF,’’ ‘‘SETUP TRIP A,’’ or ‘‘SETUPTRIP B’’ for a few seconds, thengoes back to the ‘‘CHG SETTING’’display. Press the SEL/RESETbutton, then press the INFO buttonrepeatedly to select anothercustomizing mode.

On the right-hand drive type only

Display Unit



IGN OFF is selected.

06/12/06 10:45:19 32SMR600_127

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘DISPLAY UNIT,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.

AUTO: The displayed measurementsof the trip computer on the multi-information display correspond withthe speedometer display setting. Thedisplay switches between ‘‘km’’ and‘‘miles.’’

KM: The displayed measurements ofthe trip computer on the multi-information display do notcorrespond to the speedometerdisplay switching. Always displaywith ‘‘km.’’

MILES: The displayedmeasurements of the trip computeron the multi-information display donot correspond to the speedometerdisplay switching. Always displaywith ‘‘miles.’’

You can select ‘‘AUTO,’’ ‘‘KM,’’ or‘‘MILES’’. Each time you press theINFO button, the selected modeswitches between them. Enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows theappropriate setting; ‘‘SETUP AUTO,’’‘‘SETUP KM,’’ or ‘‘SETUP MILES’’for a few seconds, then goes back tothe ‘‘CHG SETTING’’ display. Pressthe SEL/RESET button, then pressthe INFO button repeatedly to selectanother customizing mode.

CONTINUED



AUTO is selected.

06/12/06 10:45:27 32SMR600_128


You can select the REV indicator inthe instrument panel. While themulti-information display is showing‘‘REV. INDICATOR,’’ press theSEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.



REV Indicator



06/12/06 10:45:33 32SMR600_129



In the automatic driving mode, theREV indicator goes out even if thesetting is on.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display shows‘‘SETUP ON’’ or ‘‘SETUP OFF’’ for afew seconds, then goes back to the‘‘CHG SETTING’’ display. Press theSEL/RESET button, then press theINFO button repeatedly to selectanother customizing mode.

You can display the ECO indicator inthe instrument panel. While themulti-information display is showing‘‘ECO. INDICATOR,’’ press theSEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.

On vehicles with i-SHIFT

Except Type-R

CONTINUED

ECO Indicator



ON is selected.

06/12/06 10:45:41 32SMR600_130







ON is selected.

06/12/06 10:45:48 32SMR600_131

You can display the i-VTEC indicatorin the instrument panel. While themulti-information display is showing‘‘i-VTEC INDICATOR,’’ press theSEL/RESET button. The displaychanges to the setting display.



CONTINUED

Type-R model onlyi-VTEC Indicator



ON is selected.

06/12/06 10:45:54 32SMR600_132



Press and hold the INFO button toenter the customizing mode, thenpress and release the INFO button toselect ‘‘LANGUAGE.’’ While themulti-information display is showing‘‘LANGUAGE,’’ press the SEL/RESET button. The display changesto the setting display.

You can select any of the followinglanguages: English, French, German,Spanish, Italian, Portuguese. Pressand release the INFO button toselect the language, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter theselection.



Selecting Language

130

06/12/06 10:46:01 32SMR600_133

CONTINUED

When the language selection issuccessfully completed, the displaychanges to the screen shown abovefor a few seconds, then goes back tothe ‘‘LANGUAGE’’ display. Press theINFO button repeatedly to selectanother customizing mode.

If you fail to set the language setting,you will see ‘‘INCOMPLETE’’ on thedisplay for a few seconds. Thedisplay returns to the setting mode.Repeat the setup.

To exit the customizing mode, selectthe exit mode shown above bypressing the INFO button repeatedly,then press the SEL/RESET button.The display goes back to the normaldisplay.



ENGLISH is selected.

06/12/06 10:46:07 32SMR600_134

If you want to set the customizablevehicle control settings to the defaultsetting, press the INFO button onthe steering wheel repeatedly until‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is displayed, thenpress the SEL/RESET button.

The display shows the selectableitems. If you want to cancel‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ select ‘‘CANCEL’’by pressing the INFO button, thenpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton for about 3 seconds to set.The display goes back to the normaldisplay.

To set the default settings, select‘‘OK’’ by pressing the INFO button,then press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton for about 3 seconds to set.



Default Settings

132

06/12/06 10:46:13 32SMR600_135

After the DEFAULT ALL operationis completed, you will see the abovedisplay for a few seconds, then thedisplay switches to the languagesetting mode.

If the DEFAULT ALL operation isnot successful, you will see the abovedisplay for a few seconds, then thedisplay goes back to the settingdisplay.



06/12/06 10:46:18 32SMR600_136

Rev indicator is on.

ECO indicator is on.

In the automatic driving mode, theREV indicator goes out.

Displayed language is English.

i-VTEC indicator is off.

Default setting is selected.

The following are the default valuesfor each customizable setting.

The speed alarm function is off.

The warning message function isoff. Only the symbols aredisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay.

Outside temperature displayadjustment value is 0°C.

Average fuel mileage for tripmeter A is not reset on refueling.

The elapsed time is reset with theignition switch in the LOCK (0)position.

Measurements in the tripcomputer correspond with themeasurements selected with themph to km/h change button(km/h or mph).




06/12/06 10:46:28 32SMR600_137

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equippedTo use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.

2 :1 :

CONTINUED

Controls Near the Steering Wheel


Left-hand drive typeWINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTONENGINE START BUTTON


VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS REMOTE AUDIO

CONTROLS



CIGARETTE LIGHTER



HORN

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER

VSA OFF SWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/REAR FOG LIGHT/FRONT FOG LIGHTS


(P.342)

(P.140, 142, 143)

(P.318, 319, 320)

(P.146)

(P.280)

(P.269) (P.147)

(P.90)

(P.182)

(P.276)

(P.145)

(P.145, 173)(P.137)

(P.144)

2

2

2

2

1

2

06/12/06 10:46:36 32SMR600_138

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equippedTo use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.

2 :1 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel



WINDSCREENWIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

HEADLIGHTADJUSTER



REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS



ENGINE STARTBUTTON

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

HORN



mph to km/hCHANGE BUTTON


Without cruise control

With navigation system

(P.85)

VSA OFF SWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/REAR FOG LIGHT/FRONT FOG LIGHTS


(P.145)

(P.90)

(P.280)

(P.144)

(P.269)

(P.182)(P.147) (P.90)

(P.276)

(P.146)

(P.318, 319, 320)

(P.137)

(P.342)

(P.140, 142, 143)(P.145, 173)

2

2

1

2

2

2

06/12/06 10:46:44 32SMR600_139

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－－

＊

＊

Push the lever up or down to select aposition.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle’s speed.

If you turn it to the shortest delay,the wipers will change to lowspeed operation when the vehiclespeed exceeds 20 km/h (12 mph).

Vary the delay by turning theINT TIME ring.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindscreen whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

The wipers run at high speed.

When you pull back on the wipercontrol lever with the headlightswitch ON, the headlight washersand windscreen washers work at thesame time.

The headlight washers use the samefluid reservoir as the windscreenwashers.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

The wipers run at low speed.

MISTOFFINT Intermittent(AUTO )LO Low speedHI High speedWindscreen washers

On vehicles with automaticintermittent wipers, see page

.

:

1.2.3.

4.5.6.

138CONTINUED

Windscreen Wipers

INT

MIST

OFF

HI

Headlight Washer(For some types)

Windscreen Washers

LO

Windscreen Wipers and Washers


06/12/06 10:46:56 32SMR600_140

On some models

The automatic intermittent wipersystem senses rainfall andautomatically turns on thewindscreen wipers. To enablesensing, push the lever down toselect AUTO.

You can adjust the sensitivity of thesystem by turning the AUTOsensitive ring on the wiper lever.

When the system senses rainfall, itturns on the windscreen wipers andvaries their speed (intermittent, lowspeed, or high speed) depending onhow hard it is raining. This functionis available when the vehicle speedexceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).

When the wiper lever is in the ‘‘LO’’(low speed) or ‘‘HI’’ (high speed)position, the windscreen wipers runat that speed. Automatic sensing isdisabled.

Automatic Intermittent Wipers



AUTO SENSITIVE RING

06/12/06 10:47:03 32SMR600_141

Do not position the wiper lever inAUTO when driving through a carwash. Turn off this system when notin use.

The rainfall sensor is located in thewindscreen near the rearview mirror.If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,dust, etc., the wipers may notoperate properly or may operateunexpectedly.



RAINFALL SENSOR

06/12/06 10:47:07 32SMR600_142

－－Push down or up onthe lever to signal a turn. To signal alane change, push lightly on thelever in the proper direction and holdit. The lever will return to centrewhen you release it or complete aturn.

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the position lights, tail-lights,instrument panel lights, and rearlicence plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

Turn signalOffPosition and indicator lightsAUTO (on some models)Headlights onHigh beamsFlash high beams

To signal a lane change easily, pushthe turn signal lever in the properdirection lightly and release it. Theleft or right turn signal indicator onthe instrument panel and theappropriate outside turn signals willblink three times.

If you hold the turn signal lever, theturn signal continues to blink andwill stop when you release it.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or the ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a‘‘HEADLIGHTS ON’’ message onthe multi-information display.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.

Turn Signal Headlights On

One-push Turn Signal

Turn Signals and Headlights


06/12/06 10:47:15 32SMR600_143

－－ On some models

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights, allother exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on the automatic lighting,turn the light switch to AUTO at anytime. The lights will come onautomatically when the outside lightlevel becomes low (at dusk, forexample). The lights on indicatorcomes on as a reminder. The lightsand indicator turn off automaticallywhen the system senses highambient light.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click to turnon the high beams. The blue highbeam indicator will come on (seepage ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

The daytime running lights come onautomatically when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. They go out automaticallywhen the light switch is ON.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

The lights turn off automaticallywhen you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position. To turn themon again, either turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, orturn the light switch to position.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or the engine off for along time.

If there is a problem with the controlsystem, you will see the symbol‘‘ ,’’ or the symbol with a‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer assoon as possible.

82

CONTINUED

AUTOHigh Beams

(For some types)Daytime Running Lights

Headlights


06/12/06 10:47:25 32SMR600_144

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on thewindscreen near the rearview mirror.Do not cover this sensor or spillliquids on it.

The rear fog light switch is locatednext to the light control switch. Youcan use the rear fog light when theheadlights are on (the light controlswitch is in the position).

To operate the rear fog light, turnthe switch up from the off ( )position. The indicator in theinstrument panel comes on toindicate that the rear fog light is on.

You can turn off the rear fog lightwith the headlights on by turning theswitch up again.

The rear fog light will go off whenyou turn the headlights off. To turnthe rear fog light on again, you haveto turn the rear fog light switchagain with the headlights on.

(For some types)Rear Fog Light

Headlights, Front and Rear Fog Lights


LIGHTING SENSOR

REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH

06/12/06 10:47:34 32SMR600_145

The fog light switch is located nextto the light control switch. You cancontrol the front fog lights with thisswitch when the light control switchis in the or position.

You can also use the rear fog lightwhen the light control switch is inthe position or the front foglights are turned on.

To turn on the rear fog light only,turn the switch down from the off( ) position. The indicator inthe instrument panel comes on toindicate that the rear fog light is on.

You can turn off the rear fog lightwith the headlights on by turning theswitch down again.

To operate the front fog lights, turnthe switch up from the off ( )position to the position. The

indicator comes on as areminder. To turn the rear fog lighton with the front fog lights, turn theswitch one position up from the

position.

You can turn off the rear fog lightwith the front fog lights on byturning the switch up again.

The front and rear fog lights will gooff when you turn the light controlswitch off. With only the rear foglight on, it will go off when you turnthe headlights off.

When you turn the light controlswitch on again, the front fog lightswill also turn on. To turn the foglights completely off, turn the foglight switch down to the off ( )position.

To turn the rear fog light on again,you have to turn the fog light switchagain with the headlights on( position) or the front foglights on.

Front and Rear Fog Lights(For some types)

Front and Rear Fog Lights


FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH

06/12/06 10:47:45 32SMR600_146

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position.

You can adjust the brightness to thedesired level with the headlightswitch off, and also with theheadlight switch on. Both settingswill remain at those levels until youchange them.

Each display (upper and lower) willilluminate with reduced brightnesswhen you unlock and open thedriver’s door, then go to normalbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns offafter about 10 seconds.

The knob on the instrument paneladjusts the brightness of the instru-ment panel. Push on the knob to popit out, then turn it to adjust thebrightness.

Push the knob back in to preventyour setting from accidentallychanging.

The brightness can be shown withinthe six brightness levels on themulti-information display. When youturn the knob, the lower segment ofthe display changes to vertical barsthat show you the current level. Youwill hear a tone when you reach themaximum or minimum brightness.The brightness level goes out about5 seconds after you stop adjusting.

Instrument Panel Brightness


BRIGHTNESS LEVELS

06/12/06 10:47:52 32SMR600_147

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

Pushing the demister also turns themirror heaters on and off. For moreinformation, see page .

The rear window demister will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position. Push thedemister button to turn it on and off.The indicator in the button comes onto show the demister is on. It alsoshuts off when you turn off theignition switch. You have to turn thedemister on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Push the red button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all outsideturn signals and both turn indicatorsin the instrument panel to flash. Usethese lights to give a warning toother road users that your vehicle iscausing a hazard.

The demister and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.

173

Rear Window DemisterHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Demister


06/12/06 10:48:01 32SMR600_148

The vertical angle of the headlights(low beam) can be adjustedaccording to the number of personsand the loading weight in theluggage area.

Push the knob to pop it out, thenturn the knob to select anappropriate angle of the headlights.After adjusting, push the knob backin to prevent your setting fromaccidentally changing.

A driver or a driver and passengerin the front seat.

Your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic headlight adjustingsystem that senses changes in thevehicle posture due to riding andloading conditions of the passengersand their luggage and adjusts thevertical angle of the headlights (lowbeam) automatically.

Five or four (Type-R model)persons in the front and rear seats.Five or four (Type-R model)persons in the front and rear seatsand luggage in the luggage area,within the limits of maximumpermissible axle weight andmaximum permissible vehicleweight.A driver and luggage in theluggage area, within the limits ofmaximum permissible axle weightand maximum permissible vehicleweight.

0:

1:

2:

3:

On vehicles with headlights bulbs ofhigh voltage discharge tube

(For some types)

Headlight Adjuster


06/12/06 10:48:09 32SMR600_149

Make any steering wheeladjustments before you start driving.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustments


Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control ofthe vehicle and be seriouslyinjured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheelonly when the vehicle isstopped.

LEVER

06/12/06 10:48:16 32SMR600_150

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

Two ignition keys come with yourvehicle. You should keep one ofthem in a safe place, away from thevehicle, as a spare.They fit all the locks on your vehicle.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

Your two ignition keys are also fittedwith remote transmitters; see page

for an explanation of theoperation.154

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


KEYNUMBERTAG

IGNITION KEYSWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

06/12/06 10:48:24 32SMR600_151

－

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

(EU models)EC DirectivesThis immobilizer system complieswith the R & TTE (Radio equipmentand Telecommunications TerminalEquipment and the mutualrecognition of their conformity)Directives.

The ignition switch has threepositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), and ON (II).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly.

CONTINUED

Immobilizer System Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch


06/12/06 10:48:34 32SMR600_152

－

－

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system (on sometypes) and the cigarette lighter inthis position.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

On some types, the headlights comeon automatically in this position.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. You will also seethe symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or the symbolwith an ‘‘IGNITION KEY’’ messageon the multi-information display.Remove the key to turn off thebeeper and the warning symbol.

The engine can be started with thekey in this position by pressing theENGINE START button (see page

on petrol models with manualtransmission, page on petrolmodels with i-SHIFT, and page

on diesel models).

318319

320

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

Ignition Switch


Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control ofthe vehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

06/12/06 10:48:43 32SMR600_153

To lock the doors and the tailgate,push the top of the master door lockswitch on the driver’s door, pull thelock tab rearward on the driver’sdoor, or use the key on the outsidelock on the driver’s door.

Pushing the bottom of the masterdoor lock switch or pushing forwardthe lock tab on the driver’s door willunlock both doors and the tailgate.

Both doors and the tailgate lock orunlock when you use the key to lockor unlock the driver’s door.

Each door has a lock tab next to theinner door handle. Pushing forwardor rearward the lock tab on eachpassenger’s door only locks andunlocks that door.

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tabnext to the inner door handle.

Pushing the bottom of the masterdoor lock switch will unlock all doorsand the tailgate.

Only the driver’s door unlocks whenyou use the driver’s door lock tab.

To unlock the driver’s door from theoutside, turn the key and release it.If you turn it again, all doors and thetailgate unlock.

On some types

CONTINUED

Power Door Locks

Door Locks


MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Lock

Unlock

RED INDICATOR

Lock

Unlock

06/12/06 10:48:53 32SMR600_154

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, the master doorlock switch is disabled. It is notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.If you try to lock an open driver’sdoor by pulling the lock tab rearwardwith the outside handle pulled, thetabs on all doors pop out.

When you lock the doors and thetailgate with the key or the remotetransmitter, all outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel flash three times to verify thedoors and the tailgate are locked andthe security system has set (seepage ).

The security system activates afteryou lock the doors and the tailgatewith the lock tab on the driver’s dooror the master door lock switch (seepage ).

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab rearward and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull andhold the outside door handle, andpull the lock tab rearward or pushthe top of the master door lockswitch, then close the door.

273

273

On vehicles with security system

Lockout Prevention

Door Locks


06/12/06 10:48:59 32SMR600_155

The super locking helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.To set the super locking, turn thekey towards the front of the vehicletwice within 5 seconds.

You can also set the super lockingwith the remote transmitter. To set it,push the LOCK button twice within5 seconds (see page ).

Only the remote transmitter canreset the security system. Unlockingthe driver’s door with the keyactivates the alarm.

To cancel the super locking, unlockthe driver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

If you set the super locking with thewindows open, the ultrasonic sensormay activate the alarm unexpectedlywhen the system senses strongvibrations on the vehicle or loudsound.

The super locking will not set ifeither door or the tailgate is not fullyclosed. It will be set even if thebonnet, or either window is open.

With the super locking set, themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door and the lock tabs onboth doors are disabled.

155

On vehicles with ultrasonic sensor

On vehicles with ultrasonic sensor

Super Locking(For some types)

Door Locks


If there are persons inside thevehicle with the superlocking set, they cannotunlock the doors from theinside.

Make sure there is no personinside the vehicle beforesetting the super locking.

06/12/06 10:49:08 32SMR600_156

－

－

You cannot unlock the doors and thetailgate if the key is in the ignitionswitch.

Press this button to lockboth doors and the tailgate. Whenyou push the LOCK button, alloutside turn signals and bothindicators in the instrument panelflash three times to verify the doorsand the tailgate are locked and thesecurity system (if equipped) has set.You cannot lock the doors and thetailgate if either door or the tailgateis not fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

Press this button tounlock both doors and the tailgate.When you push the UNLOCK button,all outside turn signals, and bothindicators in the instrument panelflash once.

If you do not open either door or thetailgate within 30 seconds, the doorsand the tailgate automatically relockand the security system (ifequipped) sets.

Press this button once to unlock thedriver’s door. Push it twice to unlockthe remaining doors and the tailgate.

The front ceiling light (if the lightswitch is in the Door position) andrear ceiling light (if the light switchis in the centre position) will comeon when you press the UNLOCKbutton. If you do not open eitherdoor or the tailgate within 30seconds, the lights fade out. If yourelock the doors and tailgate withthe remote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the lights willgo off immediately.

On some types

LOCK

UNLOCK

Remote Transmitter


LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

06/12/06 10:49:16 32SMR600_157

You can set the super locking withthe remote transmitter. To set thesuper locking, push the LOCKbutton twice within 5 seconds.

See page for information on thesuper locking.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.To cancel the super locking, push

the UNLOCK button on the remotetransmitter, or unlock the driver’sdoor with the key.

The super locking will not set ifeither door or the tailgate is not fullyclosed. It will be set even if thebonnet, or either window is open.

153

Super Locking(For some types)

Remote Transmitter Care

Remote Transmitter


If there are persons inside thevehicle with the superlocking set, they cannotunlock the doors from theinside.

Make sure there is no personinside the vehicle beforesetting the super locking.

06/12/06 10:49:25 32SMR600_158

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

To replace the battery: Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

1.

3.

2.

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter


TABSCREW

BATTERY

06/12/06 10:49:34 32SMR600_159

＋

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

Install the parts in reverse order.

EC DirectivesThis keyless entry system complieswith the R & TTE (Radio equipmentand Telecommunications TerminalEquipment and the mutualrecognition of their conformity)Directives.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

4.

5.

(EU models)

Remote Transmitter


06/12/06 10:49:40 32SMR600_160

The tailgate will lock or unlock whenyou lock or unlock the driver’s doorwith the key, the remote transmitter,the master door lock switch, or thelock tab on the driver’s door.

To open the tailgate, push therelease, then lift up. To close thetailgate, use the inner handle to pullit down, then press down on the backedge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.65

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Tailgate

158

HANDLERELEASE

06/12/06 10:49:46 32SMR600_161

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually. In this case, you cannotopen the tailgate with the release.

To open the tailgate, access thetailgate release lever from inside thevehicle.Place a cloth on the edge of thecover, then use a small flat-tippedscrewdriver to remove the cover onthe back of the tailgate.

Push the release lever to the lowerright as shown.

If you need to open the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Opening the Tailgate Manually

Tailgate


Lock

Unlock(open)

COVER

06/12/06 10:49:53 32SMR600_162

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

15 16

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat cushion.

Front Seat Adjustments

Seats


Driver’s seat is shown.

SEAT-BACK ANGLEADJUSTMENTLEVER

06/12/06 10:50:01 32SMR600_163

To get into the back seat on thedriver’s side and passenger’s side,pull the release lever up on the sideof the seat-back or pull up on theseat-back adjustment lever. The seat-back will tilt and slide forward toallow easier entry to the back seat.

After a passenger gets into the backseat, push the seat-back to return theseat. You may need to re-adjust theseat-back angle and forward backposition before sitting in the frontseat. Make sure the seat is fullylatched before sitting in it.

Rear Seat Access

Seats


SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVERSEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER

RELEASE LEVER

RELEASE LEVER

Driver’s side Passenger’s side RELEASE LEVER

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER

06/12/06 10:50:07 32SMR600_164

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

16Except for Type-R model

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Make sure to pull the lever upwardor downward to its full range.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecentre of the restraint.

Head RestraintsDriver’s Seat Height Adjustment

Seats


RELEASE BUTTON

Front Position

06/12/06 10:50:16 32SMR600_165

When carrying a passenger in therear centre seating position, makesure the rear centre head restraint isadjusted to its highest position.

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest.

To remove a head restraint forfolding down the rear seat, cleaningor repair, pull it up as far as it will go.Push the release button and pull therestraint out of the seat-back.

Except for Type-R model On all models Armrest

Seats


Always replace the rear headrestraints when the seat-backs are returned to uprightposition.

Rear Centre Position Rear Outer Position

06/12/06 10:50:23 32SMR600_166

The left and right rear seat-backscan be folded down separately tomake more luggage space.

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold down the seat-back.

Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

Make sure that there are no items onthe passenger compartment floorbefore you fold down the seat-back.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

Put the outer shoulder belt in theclip on each side.

Pull up on the release lever on theoutside of the seat-back.

Fold the seat back forward.

With only half the seat-back folded,you can carry only one passenger inthe rear outer seating position. Youcannot use the seat belt properly onthe rear centre seating position (onsome models) in this case.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Folding the Rear Seats

Seats


CLIP

06/12/06 10:50:32 32SMR600_167

Make sure all items in the luggagearea are secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (See

on page ).

Reverse this procedure to return theseat-back to the upright position.Tug on the seat-back to make sure itis latched. If the seat-back is notlatched fully, the seat belt will notwork properly and you will see thered indicator behind the releaselever as shown.

310Carrying

Luggage

Seats


Always replace the rear headrestraints when the seat-backs are returned to uprightposition.

Make sure the seat-backs arelatched securely beforedriving.

REDINDICATOR

06/12/06 10:50:38 32SMR600_168

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be in the ON (II) position touse the heaters.

Push the front of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.In the LO setting, the heater runs

continuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Seat Heaters (For some types)


SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

06/12/06 10:50:45 32SMR600_169

The luggage area cover can beremoved to give you more luggageheight.

To remove the cover, take off thehooks from the tailgate, slide thecover towards the rear, then lift itstraight up.

To install the cover, set the mount-ing rods to the recesses and slide thecover towards the front until it clipsinto place. Make sure it is securelylatched so it will not come loosewhile you are driving.

Lower the tailgate and put the hooksback in place.

Luggage Area Cover (For some types)


HOOK MOUNTING ROD

06/12/06 10:50:51 32SMR600_170

－

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower eitherwindow. To open the window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want thewindow to stop. Pull back on theswitch and hold it to close thewindow.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open the front passenger’swindow, push down on the switchand hold it down until the windowreaches the desired position. Toclose the window, pull back on thewindow switch. Release the switchwhen the window gets to the positionyou want.

To open the driver’s or thefront passenger’s window fully, pushthe window switch firmly down, thenrelease it. The window automaticallygoes down all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s or the frontpassenger’s window fully, pull backthe window switch firmly, thenrelease it. The window automaticallygoes all the way up. To stop thewindow from going all the way up,push down on the window switchbriefly.

Always take the ignitionkey with you whenever you leave thevehicle alone (with other occupants).

AUTO


Power Windows

168

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingerscan cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengersare away from the windowsbefore closing them.

WARNING:

DRIVER’SWINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

06/12/06 10:50:59 32SMR600_171

－ If either of thefront windows runs into any obstaclewhile it is closing automatically, itwill stop, and then reverse direction.To close the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

To open or close the driver’s or thefront passenger’s window partially,push down or pull back on thewindow switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is OFF, and thepassenger’s window cannot be raisedor lowered. To cancel this feature,push on the switch again to get it topop out. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating the windowunintentionally.

The indicator in the AUTO switchcomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The power windows have a key-offdelay. You can still open and closethe windows for up to 10 minutes or45 seconds (on some types) afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the powerwindows to operate.

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows


06/12/06 10:51:05 32SMR600_172

Both of the front and rear sunshadescan be opened. The front sunshadeis rolled up in the centre holder fromfront to rear, and the rear sunshadefrom rear to front at the same time.Use the switch on the front ceiling tooperate the sunshades. You mustturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to operate thesunshades.

To open the sunshades, push on therear of the switch and hold it.Release the switch when thesunshades reach the desired position.Push on the front of the switch andhold it to close them. Release theswitch to stop the operation.

Always take the ignitionkey with you whenever you leave thevehicle alone (with other occupants).

Sunshades (For some types)


Opening or closing thesunshade on someone’shands or fingers may causeinjury.

Make sure all hands andfingers are clear of thesunshade before opening orclosing it.

WARNING:

06/12/06 10:51:11 32SMR600_173

－－To open the sunshadesfully, push on the rear of the switchfirmly, then release it. Thesunshades automatically open all theway. To stop the sunshades fromopening, push on the switch briefly.

To close the sunshade fully, push onthe front of the switch firmly, thenrelease it. The sunshadesautomatically close all the way. Tostop the sunshades from closing,push on the switch briefly.

To open or close the sunshadespartially, push on the rear or front ofthe sunshade switch lightly and holdit. The sunshade will stop when yourelease the switch.

If either of thefront and rear sunshades runs intoany obstacle while they are closingautomatically, each sunshade willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the sunshades, remove theobstacle, then use the sunshadeswitch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing wheneach sunshade is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the sunshades before closingthem.

The sunshades have a key-off delay.You can still open and close thesunshades for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as ayou open either front door.

AUTO AUTO REVERSE

Sunshades (For some types)


06/12/06 10:51:17 32SMR600_174

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L (leftside) or R (right side).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the centre (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch to keep yoursettings.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


TAB

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

06/12/06 10:51:26 32SMR600_175

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the rear window demisterbutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on as a reminder. Press thebutton again to turn the heaters andthe demister off.

Never drive your vehicle with theoutside mirrors folded.

Door mirrors can be folded by thefolding switch next to the mainswitch, which enables you to parkyour vehicle in a limited parkingspace easily. Make sure you fold outthe mirrors before you start driving.With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, press the folding switchto fold up both outside mirrorssimultaneously. To fold out, pressthe switch again.

Power Mirror Heaters Folding Door Mirrors(On some models)

Mirrors


REAR WINDOWDEMISTER/HEATED MIRRORBUTTON

06/12/06 10:51:34 32SMR600_176

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper willsound if the vehicle is driven withthe parking brake on.

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display.

77

Parking Brake


PARKING BRAKE LEVER

06/12/06 10:51:40 32SMR600_177

＊

＊

＊

Interior Convenience Items


CIGARETTELIGHTER

BEVERAGEHOLDER

: For some types

COAT HOOK

CENTREPOCKET

CENTRE CONSOLE

GLOVE BOX

ASHTRAY

REAR ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

SUN VISORVANITY MIRROR

UNDER-FLOORLUGGAGE AREA

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

06/12/06 10:51:45 32SMR600_178

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the centre console side.Close it with a firm push.

You can store beverage bottles andcans in the glove box, and keep themcool with the air conditioning system.To keep the inside of the glove boxcool, open the glove box, then openthe air vent on the upper side byturning the dial anticlockwise. Turnon the air conditioning (see pages

and ), and set the modecontrol to ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position.The cool air is diverted from the air

conditioning system into the glovebox through the air vent.

Use only resealable containers orkeep unopened cans in the glove box.Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery and electricalcomponents in the glove box andinside the dashboard. Make sure toclose the air vent by turning the dialclockwise when it is not used.If you use the heating, the warmedair is diverted into the glove box withthe air vent opened.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the position lights are on.

200 206

Glove Box

Cool Box(On some models)



An open glove box can causeserious injury to yourpassenger in a crash, even ifthe passenger is wearing theseat belt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

DIAL

GLOVE BOX

Open

Close

06/12/06 10:51:55 32SMR600_179

Your vehicle has a multi-functioncentre console. It includes beverageholders, storage compartments, anarmrest, a cigarette lighter, aremovable ashtray, and seat heaters(if equipped).

The centre console maincompartment is under the armrest.To use it, pull up on the lever and liftup the armrest.

The centre lower consolecompartment can be used for thebeverage holders or as a storagespace. To open the compartment,slide the lid backward.

To close the compartment, slide thelid forward.

There is a partition in thecompartment. Slide it backward touse the compartment as a storagespace. You can also remove theashtray by pulling it straight up toextend the compartment.

Centre Console Console Compartments



06/12/06 10:52:04 32SMR600_180

The front beverage holder is in thecentre console compartment. To usethe beverage holder, slide the lidbackward, and move the partitionforward until it stops.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

If equippedBeverage Holders



Front Rear

06/12/06 10:52:10 32SMR600_181

Your vehicle has an accessory powersocket on the left side in the luggagearea. This socket is intended tosupply power for 12 volt DCaccessories that are rated 120 wattsor less (10 amps).

To use it, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON(II) position. It will not power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

It is recommended that thisaccessory socket is used for genuineHonda accessories.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects getting into thesocket.

To use a coat hook, slide it outslightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is pulled upwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

Accessory Power Socket Coat Hook



COAT HOOK

06/12/06 10:52:19 32SMR600_182

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The light beside the mirror comeson when you pull up the cover.

There is a storage area under thefloor in the luggage area. To keepthe lid open, hook the strap to theanchor on the back of the luggagearea cover (if equipped).

On some models

On vehicles without spare tyre

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Under-floor Storage Area



SUN VISOR

06/12/06 10:52:27 32SMR600_183

To lower the lid:

You can also lower this lid to thebottom of the storage area to extendthe luggage space. Open the lid, pullit toward you fully to disengage thelid from the support rods, then lowerthe lid on the bottom of the storagearea.



Pull outthe lid.

Lowerthe lid.

06/12/06 10:52:33 32SMR600_184

If you push in the cigarette lighterwithout the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position, it will not pop out. To returnthe cigarette lighter in place, youmust turn the ignition switch on. Donot try to pull it out forcibly.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position for the cigarette lighter towork. To heat up the lighter, push itin. It will pop out when it is ready foruse. Do not hold the lighter in whileit is heating up, you could cause it tooverheat.

To open the centre pocket, pull upthe lid.

Cigarette LighterCentre Pocket



CIGARETTELIGHTER

06/12/06 10:52:40 32SMR600_185

Use the ashtray only for cigarettes,cigars, and other smoking materials.To prevent a possible fire anddamage to your vehicle, don’t putpaper or other things that can burnin the ashtray.

Open the front ashtray by lifting thelid up. To remove the ashtray foremptying or making thecompartment bigger, open theconsole compartment by sliding thelid backwards, then lift the ashtraystraight up.

The front ceiling light has a two-position switch. In the DOORposition, the light comes on whenyou open either door. In the OFFposition, the light does not come on.To select the door position, push thebutton to pop it out.The front ceiling light also containstwo spotlights. Push the button nextto the light to turn it on and off. Youcan use the spotlights at all times.

CONTINUED

Ceiling LightsAshtray

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights


Front

ASHTRAY DOOR POSITION SELECT BUTTON

ASHTRAY

06/12/06 10:52:48 32SMR600_186

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door,the light fades out in about 30seconds.

Unlock the doors and the tailgatewith the key or remote transmitter.

The rear ceiling light has a three-position switch; ON, Door Activated,and OFF. In the Door Activated(centre) position, the light comes onwhen you:

The front ceiling light (with theswitch in the DOOR position) alsocomes on when you unlock the doorwith the key or the remotetransmitter, and when you removethe key from the ignition switch.

Open either door.

After both doors are closed tightly,the front and rear ceiling lights dimslightly, then fade out in about 30seconds.

If you leave either door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling lights will go off after 3minutes.

Interior Lights


OFF

ON

DOOR ACTIVATED

Rear

06/12/06 10:52:56 32SMR600_187

If equippedThe courtesy light between the sunvisors comes on when you turn theposition lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the instrumentpanel brightness control knob on thedashboard (see page ).

The ignition switch light comes onwhen you open either door, andfades out in about 30 seconds afteryou close the door.

144

Courtesy LightIgnition Switch Light

Interior Lights


06/12/06 10:53:01 32SMR600_188

186

06/12/06 10:53:03 32SMR600_189

＊

＊

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

Climate control system is standardon some models.

The standard audio system on somemodels has many features. Thissection describes those features andhow to use them.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

.................................Interface Dial . 188........................Vents and Heating . 189

...............Climate Control System . 195Sunlight and Temperature

...................................Sensors . 211................................Audio System . 212

Audio System (on vehicles.....without navigation system) . 213

Audio System (on vehicles with...................navigation system) . 238..................Protecting Your Discs . 268................Remote Audio Controls . 269

..........................Setting the Clock . 270............................Security System . 273

...............................Cruise Control . 276...Hands-Free Telephone System . 279

(For some types)

Features

Features 187

06/12/06 10:53:09 32SMR600_190

Your vehicle has the interface dial onthe dashboard to operate the climatecontrol system, audio system andnavigation system. Most functions ofthese systems can also be controlledwith the appropriate buttons, dials,and knobs on the dashboard, butsome functions can be accessed orselected with the interface dial only.For more information, refer to eachsystem’s appropriate section.

This dial consists of an upper part(selector) and a lower part (dial).Turn the dial left or right to select orscroll through a list or item(s) on thescreen and adjust the level orcondition. Push the selector to theleft, right, up, and down to scrollthrough and select a list or item(s).The selected item will be highlightedon the screen. To confirm the itemor enter the setting, push on thecentre of the selector (ENTER).

Interface Dial

Features

On vehicles with navigation systemonly

188

DIAL

SELECTOR

06/12/06 10:53:14 32SMR600_191

CONTINUED

If your vehicle does not have airconditioning, it can be installed atany time. Your dealer can install agenuine Honda climate controlsystem that meets Honda’s highquality standards and is designed toexactly fit your vehicle. Pleasecontact your dealer for moreinformation.

The engine must be running for theheater to generate hot air.

Proper use of the heating and airflowcontrol system can make the interiorcomfortable, and keep the windowsclear for the best visibility.

To adjust the airflow from each ventin the centre and passenger’s side,move the tab in the centre of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

The driver’s side vent can be openedand closed with the upper and lowerflaps. To open it, push in the flap asshown. To close the vent, push thebottom of either flap. To adjust theairflow from the vent, push in theflap to open it, then move the flap up-and-down and rotate the vent.

The direction of airflow from thevents in the centre and each cornerof the dashboard is adjustable.

On vehicles without air conditioning

Vents and Heating

Features 189

Centre Vents TAB

FLAP

Driver’s Side Vent

06/12/06 10:53:23 32SMR600_192

The passenger’s side vent can beopened and closed with the dialunderneath it.

Vents and Heating

Features190

TABPassenger’s Side

DIAL

06/12/06 10:53:28 32SMR600_193

▲ ▼

Turning the temperature control dialclockwise increases the temperatureof the airflow.

Select the fan speed by pressing thetop or bottom of the fan speedcontrol switch ( or ). The fanspeed is shown in vertical bars onthe display.

These two buttons control thesource of air going into the system.In fresh air mode , air comesfrom outside the vehicle. Inrecirculation mode , theinterior air recycles through thesystem.

CONTINUED

Airflow ControlsTemperature Control Dial

Fan Control

Fresh Air and Recirculation Buttons

Vents and Heating

Features 191

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE BUTTON

FAN CONTROL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/MIRROR HEATER BUTTON

FRESH AIR BUTTON

WINDSCREENDEMISTER BUTTON

Left-hand drive model is shown.

06/12/06 10:53:37 32SMR600_194

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windscreen. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode can cause the windows to fogup.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.

This button directs the main airflowto the windscreen for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. For faster defrosting,manually set the fan speed to high.You can also increase airflow to thewindscreen by closing the side ventson the dashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents, and thedemister vents at the base of thewindscreen.

Air flows from the floor andcorner vents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centreand corner vents in the dashboard.

Vents and Heating

Features

Mode Button Windscreen Demister Button

192

06/12/06 10:53:50 32SMR600_195

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Press the AUTO on thetemperature control dial.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.You will see AUTO and theselected temperature in theinformation display.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.When you turn on the rear window

demister, the heated door mirror isalso turned on automatically. Set the temperature control dial to

the lower limit.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

This button turns the rear windowdemister on and off (see page ).

The system automatically selects theproper combination of heated air andventilation to maintain the selectedtemperature. The system alsoadjusts the fan speed and airflowlevels.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

145

Features

Vents and Heating

Using the Auto HeaterVentilationRear Window Demister Button

193

06/12/06 10:53:59 32SMR600_196

If you press OFF button, the heatingand airflow control system shuts offcompletely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Select .The system automaticallyswitches to fresh air mode.

Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

Select .


To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed orhigh for faster defrosting.Select and fresh air mode.When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindscreen, close the corner vents.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents. Toclose the driver’s side vent, push thebottom of either flap, and on thepassenger’s side vent, rotate thewheel below it. This sends morewarm air to the windscreen demistervents. Once the windscreen is clear,select the fresh air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Vents and Heating

Features

To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

To Defog and Defrost

194

06/12/06 10:54:09 32SMR600_197

On vehicles with air conditioning system

On vehicles with dual temperaturecontrol system

CONTINUED

The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle picks theproper combination of airconditioning, heating, and ventilationto maintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and airflow levels.

To activate the climate controlsystem, the engine must be running.

The direction of airflow from thevents in the centre and each cornerof the dashboard is adjustable.

You can adjust the temperatures ofthe driver’s side and the passenger’sside independently (see page ).

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger.

The driver’s side vent can be openedand closed with the upper and lowerflaps. To open it, push in the flap asshown. To close the vent, push thebottom of either flap. To adjust theairflow from the vent, push in theflap to open it, then move the flap up-and-down and rotate the vent.

209

Climate Control System

Features 195

FLAP

Driver’s Side Vent

06/12/06 10:54:17 32SMR600_198

To adjust the airflow from each ventin the centre and passenger’s side,move the tab in the centre of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

The passenger’s side vent can beopened and closed with the dialunderneath it.


Features196

Passenger’s Side VentCentre Vents

06/12/06 10:54:22 32SMR600_199

CONTINUED


Features 197

06/12/06 10:54:26 32SMR600_200


Features

Without navigation system

198

Without dual temperature control system With dual temperature control system


OFF BUTTON


MODE BUTTON

FRESH AIRBUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

FANCONTROL AUTO BUTTON

FANCONTROL

FAN CONTROL


OFF BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEMISTER/MIRROR HEATERBUTTON

A/C BUTTON A/C BUTTON

AUTOBUTTON

MODE BUTTON


WINDSCREENDEMISTERBUTTON

A/C BUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

FRESH AIRBUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON RECIRCULATION

BUTTON

06/12/06 10:54:34 32SMR600_201

To put the automatic climate controlin fully-automatic mode:

Press the AUTO on thetemperature control dial.

Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see AUTO and theselected temperature in thedisplay. On vehicles with dualtemperature control system, youcan also set the passenger’s sidetemperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.



When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

When the indicator in the dualbutton is on, the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

1.

2.

209



Features

Automatic Climate Control To Turn Everything Off

199

06/12/06 10:54:45 32SMR600_202

▲ ▼


On vehicles without dual temperaturecontrol system

The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings.Press the DUAL button. When theindicator in the button is lit, turn thedial to adjust the temperature on thedriver’s side. On the Passenger’sside, press either side ( or ) ofthe temperature control button onthe front passenger’s door armrest.When the indicator is off, both sidesadjust to the same temperature.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully-automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control dial below theoutside temperature.

Turning the temperature control dialclockwise increases the temperatureof the airflow.


Features

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Temperature Control

200

PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTON

06/12/06 10:54:54 32SMR600_203

▲ ▼




When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).



The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.


Select the fan speed by pressing thetop or bottom of the fan speedcontrol switch ( or ). The fanspeed is shown in vertical bars onthe display.

Press the DUAL button to selectdual temperature control mode (seepage ).

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator is on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature with the driver’sside temperature control dial.

209

CONTINUED

Recirculation Button


Fan Control

Dual Button


Features 201

06/12/06 10:55:07 32SMR600_204




This button turns the rear windowdemister off and on (see page ).

When you turn on the rear windowdemister, the heated door mirror isalso turned on automatically.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.





When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode (on some types) and turns onthe A/C. For faster defrosting,manually set the fan speed to high.You can also increase airflow to thewindscreen by closing the cornervents on the dashboard.

145

Windscreen Demister Button Rear Window Demister ButtonMode Button


Features202

06/12/06 10:55:19 32SMR600_205



Features 203

Without dual temperature control system With dual temperature control system

SIDE DISPLAY CLIMATE CONTROL DISPLAY CLIMATE CONTROL DISPLAY

OFF BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

FAN CONTROL

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON



OFF BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEMISTER/MIRROR HEATER BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

FANCONTROL

MODE BUTTON

SIDE DISPLAY


WINDSCREEN DEMISTERBUTTON

FRESH AIR BUTTONRECIRCULATIONBUTTON

06/12/06 10:55:28 32SMR600_206

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.



When the indicator in the dualbutton is on, the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see AUTO and theselected temperature in theinformation display.

Press the AUTO on thetemperature control dial.

To put the automatic climate controlin fully-automatic mode:

In addition to the standard airconditioning controls, the climatecontrol system in your vehicle can beoperated using the voice controlsystem. See the navigation systemmanual for complete details.

1.

2.

209


On vehicles with navigation systemTo Turn Everything Off

Features


Automatic Climate Control

Voice Control System

204

06/12/06 10:55:40 32SMR600_207

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully-automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

When you make any manualselection, the current settings of theclimate control system appear on theupper part of the navigation display.The climate control display will gooff about 5 seconds after you stopmaking a manual selection. Toconfirm your manual selection on thenavigation display, push theCLIMATE button on the navigationcontrol panel.

You can also manually select thefunctions of the climate controlsystem on the navigation displaywith the interface dial. Each timeyou push the interface dial down, theselected mode switches between thefan control and the mode selection.In the fan control mode, turn theinterface dial to select a fan speed,and in the mode selection, turn thedial to select a mode. The selectedmode is highlighted on the screen.

Refer to page on how to movethe interface dial.

188

CONTINUED

Semi-automatic Operation


Features 205

MANUAL SELECTION

06/12/06 10:55:46 32SMR600_208

Press the CLIMATE button to viewthe climate control display. PushENT on the centre of the interfacedial to turn the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF in the display. Pushing the A/Cbutton on the side panel also turnsthe air conditioning on and off.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control dial below theoutside temperature.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).



The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.




Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button



Features206

06/12/06 10:55:57 32SMR600_209

▲ ▼

Press the CLIMATE button to viewthe climate control display. Pushdown the selector on the interfacedial to select the fan control mode.Turning the interface dial to increaseor decrease the fan speed andairflow. The fan speed is shown invertical bars on the display. You canalso select the fan speed by pressingthe top or bottom of the fan speedcontrol switch ( or ). You can alsoselect the fan speed by turning the

interface dial.

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator is on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature with the driver’sside temperature control dial.

CONTINUED


Fan Control

Dual Button


Features 207

06/12/06 10:56:04 32SMR600_210


When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode (on some types) and turns onthe A/C. For faster defrosting,manually set the fan speed to high.You can also increase airflow to thewindscreen by closing the cornervents on the dashboard.



You can also use the MODE buttonon the side panel to select the vents.Each time you press the MODEbutton, the selected mode ishighlighted on the display.





Press the CLIMATE button to viewthe climate control display, thenselect the mode display by pushingdown the selector on the interfacedial. Turning the interface dialselects the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.


Features

Windscreen Demister Button

Mode Control

208

06/12/06 10:56:15 32SMR600_211

▲ ▼

The temperatures of the driver’s sideand the passenger’s side can becontrolled independently when theindicator in the DUAL button is on.

To adjust the driver’s side, turn thetemperature control dial on theclimate control panel. To adjust thepassenger’s side, press either side( or ) of the temperature controlbutton on the front passenger’s doorarmrest.

This button turns the rear windowdemister off and on (see page ).

When you turn on the rear windowdemister, the heated door mirror isalso turned on automatically.

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the display(in the side display on vehicles withnavigation system). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature by adjusting thedriver’s temperature control dial.

145

CONTINUED

Features


Dual Temperature ControlRear Window Demister Button Temperature Control Dials

209

06/12/06 10:56:23 32SMR600_212

▲ ▼

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s side, press the DUALbutton, then turn the temperaturecontrol dial on the control panel. Toset the passenger’s side to adifferent value than the driver’s side,press either side ( or ) of thetemperature control button on thefront passenger’s door armrest. Youcan adjust the passenger’s sidewithout pressing the DUAL buttonfirst.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.


Features210

Passenger’s SideDriver’s Side

06/12/06 10:56:29 32SMR600_213

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors


Features 211

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

06/12/06 10:56:34 32SMR600_214

The audio system is standardequipment on some models. Readthe appropriate pages as shownbelow for the operation of the audiosystem installed in your vehicle.

On vehicles without navigationsystem, see page to .

On vehicles with navigation system,see page to .

In addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

213 237

238 267

On vehicles with navigation systemVoice Control System

Audio System

Features212

Without navigation system



06/12/06 10:56:43 32SMR600_215

Audio System (on vehicles without navigation system)

Features

Playing the Radio

213

SEEK/SKIP BAR

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

TUNE KNOB


06/12/06 10:56:48 32SMR600_216

－

－

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK bar, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

To Play the Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN


Features214

06/12/06 10:56:56 32SMR600_217

－

－

－

Select the desired band, AM, LWor FM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of 6 stations on each AM andLW, and 12 stations on FM.

If you aretravelling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. The system storesthe frequencies of 6 FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Pick a preset button (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM or LW,and two frequencies on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off auto select

AUTO SELECTPreset


Features 215

06/12/06 10:57:05 32SMR600_218

With Radio Data System (RDS)


Features216

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

TA/PTY BUTTON


06/12/06 10:57:10 32SMR600_219

－

－

－

－

With your audio system, you canutilize many convenient featuresprovided by the radio data system(RDS).

With the FM band selected, you cankeep listening to the same stationeven if its frequency changes as youenter different regions while you aretravelling.

The RDS functions turns onautomatically when you turn thesystem on. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS stations, thefrequency is displayed in theinformation display and the stationname will be displayed in the audiodisplay. Then, the system willautomatically keep selecting thefrequency with the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry thesame programs. This can save youthe trouble of retuning to obtain thesame station as long as you are in the

same RDS network area.

You can turn on or off the RDSfunction and select the RDSprograms. To switch the functionand select the program, press thepower/volume knob for more than 2seconds with the audio system on.You will hear a beep. Press any ofthe preset buttons (1 through 6) toselect the function. Each presetbutton has the following function.Pressing the preset button switchesthe function between on and off (24H and 12H on the clock mode).

Alternative frequency function on oroff

Regional program on or off

Automatic traffic program on or off

News program on or off

Program service function on or off

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Preset 1: AF ON/OFF

Preset 2: REG ON/OFF

Preset 4 A-TP ON/OFF:

Preset 5: NEWS ON/OFF

Preset 6: CLOCK 24H/12H

Preset 3: PS ON/OFF


Features 217

06/12/06 10:57:19 32SMR600_220

－－

－

－

－

－

To turn on the RDS, select 1 AF ONby pressing the preset 1. To turn offthe RDS, select 1 AF OFF. Press thepower/volume knob again to storethe setting.

This function automatically selects afrequency with the same program inthe RDS network area.

With this function, youcan switch the clock display between24-hours and 12-hours.

When the signals of the RDS stationbecome so weak that the system canno longer follow the station, thesystem will hold the last tunedfrequency and the display willchange from the station name to thefrequency.

In some countries, you cannot utilizefeatures provided by RDS as theRDS function is not provided for allstations.

Thisfunction keeps the regional programand does not change the frequencyeven if the signal becomes too weak.

This function shows the radio stationname which you are listening to.

Thisfunction automatically tunes to theradio station which is broadcastingthe traffic information.

Thisfunction automatically tunes to theradio station which is broadcastingthe newscast.

AF (Alternative Frequency) CLOCK

REG (Regional Program)

PS (Program Service Display)

A-TP (Automatic TrafficInformation Program)

NEWS (News Program)


Features218

06/12/06 10:57:27 32SMR600_221

If the station you are listening to isan RDS station, the frequencydisplay will disappear and the stationname or PTY information will bedisplayed. Press the TA/PTY buttonfor more than 2 seconds to switchthe display between the name ofnetwork/station and the PTYinformation. For more informationon the PTY, see page .

You can receive traffic informationwhile you are listening to a disc ortape (if equipped). If the system istuned to a TP station before playinga disc or tape, the system will standby for traffic announcements withthe TA/PTY button pressed (TAindicator is on) and the system willswitch from disc or tape to the trafficannouncement when it begins. Youwill see TA-INFO in the display. Thesystem will return to the disc or tapemode when the traffic information isfinished.

When you press and release the TA/PTY button, TA comes on in thedisplay and the system stands by fortraffic announcements.

When the automatic trafficinformation program (A-TP ON) isselected, TP will come on in thedisplay. This indicates that the trafficreports can be received from thetraffic information broadcastingstation.

A-TP cross-references otherprogram services that broadcasttraffic information, and the trafficreports can be received throughanother program service in the RDSnetwork area.

220

CONTINUED

Program Service Name Display TA (Traffic Announcement) StandbyFunction


Features 219

06/12/06 10:57:35 32SMR600_222

To adjust the volume of the trafficannouncement, turn the power/volume knob while theannouncement is broadcasting. Theadjusted volume level will be stored,then that level will be used on thenext time traffic announcement. Ifyou adjust the volume below theminimum level, the default level(level 9) will be used on the nexttime. The volume of the PTY NEWSor the PTY ALARM function canalso be adjusted (see page ).

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead,or is disconnected, the trafficannouncement volume level will bereset to the default setting (level 9).

To turn off the TA function, pressthe TA/PTY button again. TA will goout from the display.

If you use seek or auto select withthe TA function on, the systemsearches only TP stations.

AFFAIRS: Topical programsexpanding upon the news.

NEWS: Short accounts of facts,events, publicly expressed views,reportage, etc.

When the TA/PTY button is pressedfor more than 2 seconds until youhear a beep, the PTY displayfunction comes on. This functionshows you the program type of theselected RDS station. For example, ifthe station is broadcasting drama,DRAMA is shown in the display. If itis a station of scientific programs,SCIENCE is shown. The principalPTYs are shown as follows.222


Features

PTY (Program Type) DisplayFunction

220

06/12/06 10:57:42 32SMR600_223

INFORMATION: Generalinformation and advice.SPORT: Programs concerned withany aspect of sports.EDUCATION: Educationalprograms.DRAMA: All radio plays and serials.CULTURES: Programs concernedwith any aspect of national orregional culture.SCIENCE: Programs about nature,science, and technology.VARIED: Light entertainmentprograms.POP MUSIC: Commercial music ofpopular appeal.ROCK MUSIC: Contemporarymodern music.EASY: Light music.

CLASSICS: Traditional classics.OTHER MUSIC: Other types ofmusic, such as R & B, Reggae.WEATHER: Weather information.FINANCE: Programs concernedwith economy.CHILDREN: Programs for children.PHONE IN: Programs consisting oflistener’s messageTRAVEL: Programs concerned withtravel.

LIGHT MUSIC: Light classics;classical music for non-specialistappreciation.

JAZZ MUSIC: Jazz music.COUNTRY: Country music.NATION M: National music.

FOLK MUSIC: Folk music.SOCIAL: Social affairs programs.

RELIGION: Programs concernedwith religion.

OLDIES M: Oldies music,‘‘Golden age’’ based programs.

DOCUMENTARY: Documentaryprograms.

LEISURE: Programs about hobbiesand recreational activities.

CONTINUED


Features 221

06/12/06 10:57:59 32SMR600_224

To activate this function, press theTA/PTY button for more than 2seconds and select NEWS. Thesystem will hold the last tuned FMstation/network PTY while you arelistening to the disc. With thisfunction on, playing disc isinterrupted and the system switchesfrom disc mode to the FM newscastwhen the newscast is broadcastingfrom the FM station.

You can change the volume level ofthe interrupted newscast. Refer topage for how to adjust thevolume level.

When the program is changed toanother program or the frequencycannot be received for 10 secondsdue to a weak signal, the system willreturn to the disc modeautomatically.

If the selected RDS station does nottransmit PTY data, NO PTY isdisplayed. When the selected stationis not an RDS station, NO RDS isdisplayed for about 5 seconds.

The PTY setting mode is cancelled ifno further steps are taken within 5seconds after selecting the desiredPTY with the TUNE knob.

Some stations may broadcast theprograms with different contentsfrom their PTY code.

In the PTY search mode, the tuningstep is set to 50 kHz while searchingon the FM band. This step changesto 100 kHz when the AF or TAfunction is activated.

When you turn the TUNE knob, thedisplay will show different PTYs (seethe PTYs list on the previouscolumn).

After you select the desired programtype, the system will search for astation with the same PTY code asthe selected program type. Whenyou use this function for the firsttime, NEWS will appear as it waspreset at the factory.

After your desired PTY is displayed,press either side of the SEEK/SKIPbutton within 5 seconds. The systemwill go into the PTY search modeand search for a station of theselected PTY. If there is no stationavailable in the selected PTY, NOPTY is displayed for about 5 secondsand the PTY search mode iscancelled.

220

PTY/News Interrupt Function

Features


222

06/12/06 10:58:08 32SMR600_225

Your audio system has anotherinterrupt function (including TAfunction). The first activatedinterrupt function has priority overthe others and the indication of theother interrupt function goes out. Toactivate the other interrupt function,turn off the current interruptfunction.

PTY code ‘‘ALARM’’ is used foremergency announcements, such asnatural disasters. When this code isreceived, ‘‘ALARM’’ comes on thedisplay and the volume is changed.When the alarm is cancelled, thesystem will return to the normaloperation mode.

PTY Alarm


Features 223

06/12/06 10:58:13 32SMR600_226

－

－

－

－

－

Press the SOUND (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, andSVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation) settings.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

This audio system has the speedsensitive volume compensation(SVC) system. There are fourcompensation levels; LOW, MID(medium), HIGH and OFF. Thesystem monitors the vehicle speedand changes the volume level as thevehicle speed goes up. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio controlpanel (see page ). The audiosystem illuminates when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, even if the radio is off.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the power/volumeknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches centre,you will see a ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the volume levelaccording to the vehicle speed.

Adjusts the balance,or side-to-side strength of the sound.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the bass.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the SVCmay be reset to the default setting‘‘MID’’.

144

Adjusting the Sound Audio System Lighting

SVC

BALANCE

FADER

TREBLE

BASS

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC) System


Features224

06/12/06 10:58:23 32SMR600_227

Playing a Disc


Features 225

DISC SLOT SCAN BUTTON

DISP BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTONCD BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

EJECT BUTTON

TUNE KNOB


06/12/06 10:58:29 32SMR600_228

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay. The number of the trackplaying and the elapsed time areshown in the display. You can alsoselect the displayed information withthe DISP button (see page ). Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA standard. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. The numbers of the folderand track playing are shown in thedisplay on the disc player. You canselect up to 255 tracks or folders.

Video CDs and DVD discs will notwork in this unit.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

In a disc compressed in WMAstandard, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds the DRM file in adisc, you will see ‘‘CD FORMAT’’ inthe display for a few seconds. Thesystem searches the next availablefolder or file and plays it.


227

To Play a Disc


Features226

06/12/06 10:58:42 32SMR600_229

＞Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes.

You cannot load and play 8-cm(3-inch) discs in this system.

The display shows the first 11characters of the selected text data(the current folder, file name, etc.).With the folder or file name, you willsee the FOLDER or TRACKindicator in the display.

If a disc is compressed in MP3 orWMA format, you can see the foldername, the file name, the artist tag,the album tag and the track tag inthe display. Each time you press theDISP button, the display changes.

If a disc (CD-DA) has text data, youcan see the disc name, the trackname, and the artist tag in thedisplay. Each time you press theDISP button, the display changes.

When you press and release theDISP button while a disc without textdata is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

If the text data has more than 11characters, you will see the first 10characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the display shows thenext 11 characters. You can see up toabout 21 characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the DISPbutton again, the display shows thefirst 11 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.

When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

CONTINUED

To Load a Disc DISP Button


Features 227

06/12/06 10:58:52 32SMR600_230

－

－

In MP3 or WMA modeTo

select a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right until it clicksonce to skip to the next folder, and tothe left to move to the beginning ofthe current folder. Turn it again toskip to the beginning of the previousfolder. Turning the TUNE knobmore than two clicks skips severalfolders.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theTUNE knob to select folders in thedisc and use the SEEK/SKIP bar tochange files.

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA mode).Press and release the side toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold the or sideof the SEEK/SKIP bar.

You will also see the text data in thefollowing conditions.

When the folder or the file ischanged.

When you change the audio modeto play discs in MP3 or WMA andthe system begins to play.

When you insert a disc with textdata or compressed in MP3 orWMA, and the system begins toplay.

The display can show you up to the11 characters at a time, butdepending on the letter size, youmay not see all 11 characters.

When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the DISP button.

FOLDER SELECTION

SEEK/SKIP

To Change or Select Tracks/Files


Features228

06/12/06 10:59:02 32SMR600_231

－－－

CONTINUED

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the repeatfeature.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, press the RPT button. Youwill see F-RPT in the display. Thesystem continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button, or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob alsoturns off the repeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

This feature plays thetracks (all files in each holder inMP3 or WMA mode) within a disc inrandom order. To activate randomplay, press and release the RDMbutton. In MP3 or WMA mode, pressthe RDM button repeatedly to selectWithin a Disc Random Play. You willsee RDM in the display. Press theRDM button again to return tonormal play.

In MP3 or WMA mode


Features

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT) FOLDER-REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

229

06/12/06 10:59:09 32SMR600_232

－－－

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob alsoturns off the scan feature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal playing.

This feature, whenactivated, samples all the first files ineach folder on the disc in therecorded order from the mainfolders. To activate the folder scanfeature, press and release the SCANbutton. You will see F-SCAN in thedisplay. The system will then playthe first file in the highest levelfolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then playthe following first files for 10seconds each. When it plays a filethat you want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button again.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3 or WMA. Toactivate folder random play, pressthe RDM button. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing the RDM button again, oryou select a different folder with theTUNE knob.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom Folder Random Play to Withina Disc Random Play, then to normalplaying.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and hold theSCAN button until you hear a beep.You will see SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach track/file on the disc/folder.Press the SCAN button again to getout of scan mode and play the lasttrack sampled.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the scanfeature.

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode


Features

F-SCANFOLDER-RANDOMSCAN

230

06/12/06 10:59:16 32SMR600_233

－＋

－＋

CONTINUED

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the disc player.

To play the tape when a disc isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to thedisc player.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

An optional six disc changer isavailable for your vehicle. This discchanger uses the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player or theradio.

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the disc changer, press theCD/AUX button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 1(DISC ) button or the preset 2(DISC ) button. To select theprevious disc, press the preset 1(DISC ), or the preset 2 (DISC )to select the next disc in sequence.


Features

To Stop Playing a Disc Operating the Optional DiscChanger

231

06/12/06 10:59:25 32SMR600_234

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay. An MD player or changer is available

for your vehicle as optionalequipment. This MD player/changeruses the same controls used for thein-dash disc player or the radio.Follow the instructions that camewith the unit.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.268


Features

Operating the Optional MDPlayer/Changer(For some types)

Protecting Discs

232

06/12/06 10:59:31 32SMR600_235

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.


Features

Disc Player Error Messages

233

06/12/06 10:59:40 32SMR600_236

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.




ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

FOCUS error

Mechanical error

Press the magazine eject button and pull it out.If the message does not disappear or themagazine cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.Press the magazine eject button and pull it out.Check for an error message, and insert themagazine again. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.


Features

Optional Disc Changer ErrorMessages

234

06/12/06 10:59:48 32SMR600_237


Features

Playing a Tape (Optional for some types)

235

REPEAT BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR


06/12/06 10:59:54 32SMR600_238

△－

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Make sure the open side of the tapeis facing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator comeson to show you which side of thetape is playing. The indicates theside you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the preset 5 ( )button. When the player reaches theend of the tape, it will automaticallyreverse direction and play the otherside.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will come on in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing theNR button. Dolby remains off untilyou press the NR button again.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton on the tape player. If youwant to turn the player off, press thepower/volume knob or turn off theignition switch. The tape will remainin the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the tape player willbe in pause mode. Press the preset 5( ) button to resume play.

To switch to the radio or disc playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM or CD/AUX button. Tochange back to the tape player, pressthe CD/AUX button again.

You can remove the tape with theignition switch in any position, evenif the audio system is off.

To rewind the tape,push the preset 4 ( ) button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push thepreset 6 ( ) button. You will seeFF displayed. Press the preset 4, 5,or 6 button to take the system out ofrewind or fast forward.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.


Features

To Play a Tape

To Stop Playing a Tape

FF/REWTape Search Functions

(Optional for some types)

236

06/12/06 11:00:03 32SMR600_239

－

－

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam in the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert a foreign objectinto the tape player.

Press the side of theSEEK/SKIP bar to find thebeginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

Caring for the Tape PlayerSKIP

REPEAT


Features 237

NOTE:

06/12/06 11:00:11 32SMR600_240

On vehicles with navigation systemIn addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Playing the RadioVoice Control System

Audio System (on vehicles with navigation system)

Features238

SIDE DISPLAY AUDIO DISPLAY

PRESET BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

TUNE BAR

AM/FM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON


06/12/06 11:00:19 32SMR600_241

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button on thecontrol panel will also turn on thesystem.

You can operate the audio systemwith the control buttons on the audiopanel without displaying the audiocontrol display on the navigationscreen. The audio setting will beshown in the side display. When thenavigation system is activated, youwill also see the audio setting on theside display.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.On the audio control display of thenavigation system and the sidedisplay, the broadcasting stationname may also be displayed if theRDS is turned on (see page ).

To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or push up the selector onthe interface dial. Each time youpress the button or push up theselector, the band will change toFM1, FM2, AM (MW) and LW. Onthe FM band, STEREO will be

displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo (you will seeST on the side display).

Stereo reproduction on AM is notavailable. On the AM band, AMnoise reduction turns onautomatically.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

On the audio display of thenavigation screen, you can scroll thedisplay and enter the setting with theinterface dial. You will see theindicator , , , or

on the lower display. Thisindicates the direction to move theselector on the interface dial. For theinformation of how to use theinterface dial, see page .188

243

CONTINUED

To Play the Radio

To Select a Station


Features 239

06/12/06 11:00:29 32SMR600_242

－

－

▲▼

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and release the or

side of the SEEK bar. With theinterface dial, push the selector tothe right or to the left.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and theside to tune to a lower frequency.

To tune the radio with the interfacedial, push the selector down, thenturn the dial to select the tune mode.Press the ENT on the interface dial,then turn the selector to the desiredfrequency. To exit the tune mode,press the ENT on the interface dial.

SEEK

TUNE


Features240

06/12/06 11:00:35 32SMR600_243

－

－

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again or pushthe selector on the interface dial tothe right again.

Each preset button/iconcan store one frequency on AM(MW) and LW, and two frequencieson FM. To view the presetfrequencies, push the AUDIO button.

To store the frequency on a preseticon, push the AUDIO button to viewthe audio control display, then turnthe interface dial to select a desiredpreset icon. The selected preset iconwill be highlighted. Press and holdthe ENT on the dial for more than 2seconds to enter the setting.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of 6 stations on AM (MW)and LW, and 12 stations on FM.

Select the desired band, AM(MW), LW or FM. FM1 and FM2let you store two frequencies witheach the preset button.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.With the interface dial, push theselector down, then push it to theright to select the scan mode.

The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Preset

SCAN


Features 241

06/12/06 11:00:43 32SMR600_244

－ If you aretravelling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A.SEL button on the audiocontrol panel. You will see A. SEL onthe side display, and the system goesinto the scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix FM stations in the presetbuttons/icons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

To activate the auto select with theinterface dial, press the AUDIObutton to view the audio controldisplay, then push down theinterface dial, then turn it to selectA. SEL icon. Press the ENT on thedial to enter the setting. You will seeAUTO SEL flashing in the display,and the system goes into scan modefor several seconds.

press theA.SEL button or the ENT on theinterface dial. This restores thepresets you originally set.

To turn off auto select,

AUTO SELECT

Features


242

06/12/06 11:00:49 32SMR600_245

With your audio system, you canutilize many convenient featuresprovided by the radio data system(RDS).

With the FM band selected, you cankeep listening to the same stationeven if its frequency changes as youenter different regions while you aretravelling.

The RDS function turns onautomatically when you turn thesystem on. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thefrequency is displayed in the sidedisplay, and the station name will bedisplayed in the audio display on thenavigation screen.

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS)With Radio Data System (RDS)


Features 243

INTERFACE DIAL

TA/PTY BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON


06/12/06 11:00:58 32SMR600_246

Press the ENT on the dial to enterthe RDS setting. You will see the sixselectable RDS settings on thedisplay. Turn the interface dial toselect any of the RDS functions, thenpress the ENT on the dial to enteryour setting.

Selectable settings are described inthe following. Pushing the selectoror turning the dial to the left or rightswitches the function between onand off.

Then, the system will automaticallykeep selecting the frequency withthe strongest signal from thefrequencies that carry the sameprograms. This can save you thetrouble of retuning to obtain thesame station as long as you are in thesame RDS network area.

You can turn the RDS function on oroff and select the RDS programs. Touse the function and select theprogram, press the AUDIO buttonon the control panel to view theaudio display. Push down theselector on the interface dial, thenturn the dial to select RDS.


Features244

RDS SETTING

TA ON is selected.

06/12/06 11:01:05 32SMR600_247

－

－

－

－

－

Alternative frequencyfunction on or off

News program onor off

Trafficannouncement on or off

Regional programon or off

Program servicefunction on or off

Automatic trafficprogram on or off

This function automatically selects afrequency with the same program inthe RDS network area.

Thisfunction automatically tunes to theradio station which is broadcastingthe newscast.

This function will makethe system stand by for trafficannouncements. This function canalso be turned on or off by pressingthe TA/PTY button on the audiocontrol panel.

This function shows the radio stationname which you are listening to.

To turn on the RDS, select AF ONby turning the interface dial. To turnoff the RDS, select AF OFF. Pressthe ENT on the interface dial tostore the setting.

Thisfunction keeps the regional programand does not change the frequencyeven if the signal becomes too weak.

CONTINUED

AF ON/OFF:

NEWS ON/OFF:

TA ON/OFF:

REG ON/OFF:

PS ON/OFF:

A-TP ON/OFF:

AF (Alternative Frequency)

NEWS (News Program)

TA (Traffic AnnouncementStandby)

PS (Program Service Display)

REG (Regional Program)


Features 245

AF ON

06/12/06 11:01:15 32SMR600_248

－ Thisfunction automatically tunes to theradio station which is broadcastingthe traffic information.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop selecting the function. Pushingdown the selector also cancels thisselecting mode.

When the signals of the RDS stationbecome so weak that the system canno longer follow the station, thesystem will hold the last tunedfrequency and the display willchange from the station name to thefrequency.

When you press and release the TA/PTY button on the audio controlpanel, TA comes on in the displayand the system stands by for trafficannouncements.

When the automatic trafficinformation program (A-TP ON) isselected, TP will come on in thedisplay. This indicates that the trafficreports can be received from thetraffic information broadcasting

station.

A-TP cross-references otherprogram services that broadcasttraffic information, and the trafficreports can be received throughanother program service in the RDSnetwork area.

In some countries, you cannot utilizefeatures provided by RDS as theRDS function is not provided for allstations.

If the station you are listening to isan RDS station, the frequencydisplay will disappear and the stationname or PTY information will bedisplayed. Press the TA/PTY buttonfor more than 2 seconds to switchthe display between the name ofnetwork/station and the PTYinformation. For more informationon the PTY, see page .

You can receive traffic informationwhile you are listening to a disc ortape (if equipped). If the system istuned to a TP station before playinga disc or tape, the system will standby for traffic announcements bypressing the TA/PTY button (TAindicator is on) and the system willswitch from disc or tape to the trafficannouncement when it begins. Youwill also see ‘‘TA INFO’’ in thedisplay. The system will return to thedisc or tape mode when the trafficinformation is finished.

247

A-TP (Automatic TrafficInformation Program)

Program Service Name Display

TA (Traffic Announcement) StandbyFunction


Features246

06/12/06 11:01:24 32SMR600_249

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead,or is disconnected, the trafficannouncement volume level will bereset to the default setting (level 9).

To turn off the TA function, pressthe TA/PTY button again. TA will goout from the display. You can alsoturn the TA function on or off on theaudio display on the navigationscreen (see page ).

If you use seek or auto select withthe TA function on, the systemsearches only TP stations.

Press the AUDIO button on thecontrol panel to view the audiodisplay on the navigation screen,then push down the selector on theinterface dial to select the functiondisplay. Turn the dial to select thePTY, then press the ENT on theinterface dial.

To adjust the volume of the trafficannouncement, turn the power/volume knob while theannouncement is broadcasting. Theadjusted volume level will be stored,then that level will be used on thenext traffic announcement. Youcannot adjust the volume below theminimum level. The volume of thePTY NEWS or the PTY ALARMfunction can also be adjusted (seepage ).

This function shows you theprogram type of the selected RDSstation. For example, if the station isbroadcasting drama, DRAMA isshown in the display. If it is a stationof scientific programs, SCIENCE isshown. The principal PTYs areshown on page .249

251

244

CONTINUED


Features

PTY (Program Type) DisplayFunction

247

06/12/06 11:01:32 32SMR600_250

You will see the PTY setting: Groupand List. You can select the desiredPTY program either of the group orthe list. Select the setting by turningthe interface dial or pushing theselector to the right or left.

When the TA/PTY button on theaudio control panel is pressed formore than 2 seconds, the PTYdisplay function also comes on.

Select the list or group mode, thenpress the ENT on the interface dialto enter the setting. You will see theselectable items on the display. Pushthe selector up to move to the nextdisplay, and down to go back to theprevious display. Turn the interfacedial to select the desired PTYprogram. Press the ENT on the dialto enter your selection.

Features


248

LIST MODE GROUP MODE

06/12/06 11:01:39 32SMR600_251

CURRENT AFFAIRS: Topicalprograms expanding upon the news.INFORMATION: Generalinformation and advice.SPORT: Programs concerned withany aspect of sports.EDUCATION: Educationalprograms.DRAMA: All radio plays and serials.CULTURES: Programs concernedwith any aspect of national orregional culture.SCIENCE: Programs about nature,science, and technology.VARIED SPEECH: Lightentertainment programs.POP MUSIC: Commercial music ofpopular appeal.

ROCK MUSIC: Contemporarymodern music.EASY LISTENING: Light music.LIGHT CLASSICS M: Light classics;classical music for non-specialistappreciation.SERIOUS CLASSICS: Traditionalclassics.

WEATHER/METR: Weatherinformation.FINANCE: Programs concernedwith economy.CHILDREN’S PROGS: Programs forchildren.PHONE IN: Programs consisting oflistener’s messageTRAVEL/TOURING: Programsconcerned with travel.

The principal PTYs are shown asfollows.

OTHER MUSIC: Other types ofmusic, such as R & B, Reggae.

NEWS: Short accounts of facts,events, publicly expressed views,reportage, etc.

JAZZ MUSIC: Jazz music.COUNTRY: Country music.NATION M: National music.OLDIES M: Oldies music, ‘‘Goldenage’’ based programs.FOLK MUSIC: Folk music.SOCIAL: Social affairs programs.RELIGION: Programs concernedwith religion.DOCUMENTARY: Documentaryprograms.LEISURE: Programs about hobbiesand recreational activities.

CONTINUED


Features 249

06/12/06 11:01:58 32SMR600_252

INFORMATION: Generalinformation and advice.CULTURE: Programs concernedwith any aspect of national orregional culture.VARIED: Light entertainmentprograms.POP MUSIC: Commercial music ofpopular appeal.CLASSICS: Traditional classics.OTHER MUSIC: Other types ofmusic, such as R & B, Reggae.

After you select the desired programtype, the system will search for astation with the same PTY code asthe selected program type. Whenyou use this function for the firsttime, NEWS will appear as it waspreset at the factory.

After your desired PTY is displayed,press either side of the SEEK/SKIPbar within 5 seconds. The systemwill go into the PTY search modeand search for a station of theselected PTY. If there is no stationavailable in the selected PTY, NOPTY is displayed for about 5 secondsand the PTY search mode iscancelled.

If the selected RDS station does nottransmit PTY data, NO PTY isdisplayed. When the selected stationis not an RDS station, NO RDS isdisplayed for about 5 seconds.

The PTY setting mode is cancelled ifno further steps are taken within 5seconds after selecting the desiredPTY with the interface dial.

Some stations may broadcast theprograms with different contentsfrom their PTY code.

In the PTY search mode, the tuningstep is set to 50 kHz while searchingon the FM band. This step changesto 100 kHz when the AF or TAfunction is activated.

Features


PTY Group

250

06/12/06 11:02:08 32SMR600_253

To activate this function, press theAUDIO button on the control panelto view the audio display on thenavigation screen, then push downthe selector on the interface dial toselect the function display. Turn thedial to select the PTY, then press theENT on the interface dial.

The PTY display function also comeson by pressing and holding the TA/PTY button on the audio controlpanel for more than 2 seconds.

Turn the interface dial to selectNEWS, then press the ENT to enterthe selection. Push the selector orturn the dial to select ON, then pressthe ENT to enter the setting. Youwill see NEWS in the audio displayand the side display.

The system will hold the last tunedFM station/network PTY while youare listening to the disc. With thisfunction on, playing disc isinterrupted and the system switchesfrom disc mode to the FM newscastwhen the newscast is broadcastingfrom the FM station.

You can change the volume level ofthe interrupted newscast. Refer topage for how to adjust thevolume level.

When the program is changed toanother program or the frequencycannot be received for 10 secondsdue to a weak signal, the system willreturn to the disc modeautomatically.

Your audio system has anotherinterrupt function (including TAfunction). The first activatedinterrupt function has priority overthe others and the indication of theother interrupt function goes out. Toactivate the other interrupt function,turn off the current interruptfunction.

PTY code ‘‘ALARM’’ is used foremergency announcements, such asnatural disasters. When this code isreceived, ‘‘ALARM’’ comes on thedisplay and the volume is changed.When the alarm is cancelled, thesystem will return to the normaloperation mode.

247

Features


PTY/News Interrupt Function

PTY Alarm

251

06/12/06 11:02:16 32SMR600_254

－

－

－

－

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button onthe control panel, then push downthe selector. Turn the interface dialto select the (sound mode),then press the ENT on the dial toenter the sound grid.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

To adjust each setting, turn theinterface dial to select the settingyou want to adjust, then press theENT on the dial. The current settingis shown on the display.

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Adjusting the Sound

Features


252

06/12/06 11:02:25 32SMR600_255

－

In balance and fader setting, theright lower display shows you thecurrent setting of the sound strengthcoming from each speaker. In bassand treble setting, the display showsyou the setting with the vertical bars.

Turn the interface dial to the right orthe left to adjust the sound level,then press ENT to enter your setting.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio controlpanel (see page ). The audiosystem illuminates when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, even if the radio is off.

Adjusts the volume levelaccording to the vehicle speed.

This audio system has the speedsensitive volume compensation(SVC) system. There are fourcompensation levels; LOW, MID(medium), HIGH and OFF. Thesystem monitors the vehicle speedand changes the volume level as thevehicle speed goes up. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, the

audio volume decreases.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the SVCmay be reset to the default setting‘‘MID’’.

To select any of the four settings,turn the interface dial to select SVC,then press the ENT on the dial. Thecurrent setting is shown on thedisplay. Turn the interface dial to theright or the left to select the setting,then press the ENT to enter it.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

144

Features

Audio System Lighting

SVC


Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC) System

253

06/12/06 11:02:33 32SMR600_256

Features

Playing a Disc


254

SIDE DISPLAYAUDIO DISPLAY

EJECT BUTTON CD BUTTON

To select REPEAT, RANDOM, SCAN, SOUND

DISP BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

SEEK/SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

DISC SLOT


06/12/06 11:02:40 32SMR600_257

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toload or play discs, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.


This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA standard. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ on the audio display and theside display. In WMA format,‘‘WMA’’ will appear on each display.You can select a folder up to 99 andplay a track up to 255. If the disc hasa complex structure, it will be a whileto read the disc before the systembegins to play it.

Video CDs and DVD discs will notwork in this unit.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

In a disc compressed in WMAstandard, the DRM (digital rightsmanagement) file cannot be played.If the system finds the DRM file in adisc, you will see ‘‘CD FORMAT’’ inthe display for a few seconds. Thesystem searches the next availablefolder or file and plays it.

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session

Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48kHzBit rate: 48/64/80/96/

128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bit rateand multi-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers


CONTINUED

To Play a Disc

Features


255

06/12/06 11:02:51 32SMR600_258

－

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.

You cannot load and play 8-cm(3-inch) discs in this system.

When playing a CD with data text,the track and album titles are alsoshown. When playing a disc in MP3or WMA, the album name, the filenumber and name, the foldernumber and name, and the elapsedtime are shown. The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

When Playing a CD without data text,the number of the track playing andthe elapsed time are shown in thedisplay.

You can operate the audio systemwith the control buttons on the audiopanel without displaying the audiocontrol display on the navigationscreen. The audio setting will beshown in the side display. When thenavigation system is activated, youwill also see the audio setting on theside display.

Press the AUDIO button on thecontrol panel to show the audiodisplay of the navigation screen. Youcan scroll the display and enter thesetting with the interface dial. Youwill see the indicator , ,

, or on the lower display.This indicates the direction to movethe selector on the interface dial. Forthe information of how to use theinterface dial, see page .

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theTUNE bar to select folders in thedisc and use the SEEK/SKIP bar tochange files.

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA mode).Press and release the side, toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold the or sideof the SEEK/SKIP bar.

188

To Change or Select Tracks/FilesTo Load a Disc

SEEK/SKIP

Features


256

06/12/06 11:03:01 32SMR600_259

－

You can also select a track from thetrack list on the audio display. Pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push the selector onthe interface dial to the right toselect the track list. The currenttrack is highlighted. To select atrack, turn the interface dial, thenpress the ENT on the dial to enteryour selection.

On the track list, a track name willnot be displayed if the disc doesn’thave the text data. In this case, onlythe track number is displayed.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Press to

to skip to the next folder, andto move to the beginning of the

current folder. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

You can also select a folder on theaudio display. Press the AUDIObutton to view the audio display,then turn the interface dial to theright or the left to select the desiredfolder. The current folder ishighlighted. To see other folders,change the display with the selectoron the interface dial. Push it up toshow the next display, and down tothe previous display. Press the ENTon the dial to enter your selection.

To exit the track list, press theAUDIO button or pushing theselector to the left.

In MP3 or WMA mode

Using a Track List

FOLDER SELECTION

Features


257

06/12/06 11:03:10 32SMR600_260

－－

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the repeatfeature.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the side display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, press the RPT button. Youwill see F-RPT in the side display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Selecting adifferent folder with the TUNE baralso turns off the repeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

You can also select the repeatfunction on the audio display. Pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Turn theinterface dial to select the trackrepeat. Press the ENT on the dial toenter your selection. You will seeREPEAT on the display. To turn offthis feature, select the track repeatas previously described, then pressthe ENT again. Pressing the RPTbutton on the control panelrepeatedly also cancels this function.

In MP3 or WMA mode

Features


REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT) FOLDER-REPEAT

258

06/12/06 11:03:17 32SMR600_261

－

－

You can also select the folder repeatfunction on the audio display. Pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Turn theinterface dial to select the folderrepeat. Press the ENT on the dial toenter your selection. You will seeFOLDER REPEAT on the display.To turn off this feature, select thefolder repeat as previously described,then press the ENT again. Pressingthe RPT button on the control panel

repeatedly also cancels this function.

This feature plays thetracks (all files in each holder inMP3 or WMA mode) within a disc inrandom order.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3 or WMA. Toactivate Folder Random play, pressthe AUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Turn theinterface dial to select the folderrandom. Press the ENT on the dialto enter your selection. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM on the display.To turn off this feature, select thefolder random as previouslydescribed, then press the ENT again.

To activate Random Play, press theAUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Turn theinterface dial to select the trackrandom. Press the ENT on the dial

to enter your selection. You will seeRANDOM on the display. To turn offthis feature, select the track randomas previously described, then pressthe ENT again.

In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

FOLDER-RANDOM

Features


259

06/12/06 11:03:25 32SMR600_262

－

Selecting a different folder with theTUNE bar also deactivates thisfunction.

The SCAN functionsamples all tracks on the disc in theorder they are recorded on the disc(all files in MP3 or WMA mode). Toactivate the scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the side display. Youwill get a 10 second sampling of eachtrack/file on the disc. Press theSCAN button again to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the scanfeature.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the disc player.

To play the tape when a disc isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to thedisc player.

You can also select the scan featureon the audio display. Press theAUDIO button to view the audiodisplay, then push down the selectoron the interface dial. Push theselector to the right to select thescan feature. You will see SCANblinking on the display. To turn offthis feature, push the selector to theright again.

SCAN

To Stop Playing a Disc

Features


260

06/12/06 11:03:34 32SMR600_263

－

＋

－＋

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

An optional six disc changer isavailable for your vehicle. This discchanger uses the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player or theradio.

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the disc changer, press theCD/AUX button. The disc andtrack/file numbers will be displayed.To select a different disc, use thepreset 1 (DISC ) button or the

preset 2 (DISC ) button. To selectthe previous disc, press the preset 1(DISC ), or the preset 2 (DISC )to select the next disc in sequence.

You cannot select the controls on theaudio display of the navigationsystem. The audio setting will bedisplayed only in the side display.The text data cannot be displayed inthe side display, so you can see thedisc and track/file numbers only.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

Operating the Optional DiscChanger

Features


261

06/12/06 11:03:40 32SMR600_264

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.An MD player or changer is availablefor your vehicle as optionalequipment. This MD player/changeruses the same controls used for thein-dash disc player or the radio.Follow the instructions that camewith the unit.

268

Protecting DiscsOperating the Optional MDPlayer/Changer(For some types)

Features


262

06/12/06 11:03:46 32SMR600_265

ErrorMessage

Cause SolutionThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.




FOCUS error

Mechanical error

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Ifthe disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.

Disc Player Error Messages

Features


263

06/12/06 11:03:55 32SMR600_266

Cause SolutionErrorMessageThe chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.




FOCUS error

Mechanical error

Press the eject button, and remove the disc(s).Check for an error message. Insert the disc(s)again. If the massage does not disappear or thedisc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer.Press the eject button, and remove the disc(s).Check for an error message. Insert the disc(s)again. If massage does not disappear or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer.

Optional Disc Changer ErrorMessages

Features


264

06/12/06 11:04:03 32SMR600_267


Features

Playing a Tape (Optional for some types)

265

The audio display is notavailable.

SIDE DISPLAY

PRESET BUTTONS

CD/AUX BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB


06/12/06 11:04:09 32SMR600_268

△

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Make sure the open side of the tapeis facing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator comeson to show you which side of thetape is playing. The indicates theside you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the preset 5 ( )button. When the player reaches theend of the tape, it will automaticallyreverse direction and play the otherside.

You cannot select the controls on theaudio display of the navigationsystem. The audio setting will bedisplayed only in the side display.The text data cannot be displayed inthe side display, so you can see thedisc and track/file numbers only.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will come on in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing theNR button. Dolby remains off untilyou press the NR button again.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton on the tape player. If youwant to turn the player off, press thepower/volume knob or turn off theignition switch. The tape will remainin the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the tape player willbe in pause mode. Press the preset 5( ) button to resume play.

To switch to the radio or disc playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM or CD/AUX button. Tochange back to the tape player, pressthe CD/AUX button again.

You can remove the tape with theignition switch in any position, evenif the audio system is off.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape(Optional for some types)

Features


266

06/12/06 11:04:18 32SMR600_269

－－

－

To rewind the tape,push the preset 4 ( ) button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push thepreset 6 ( ) button. You will seeFF displayed. Press the preset 4, 5,or 6 button to take the system out ofrewind or fast forward.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

Press the side of theSEEK/SKIP bar to find thebeginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

Damaged tapes can jam inside thedrive or cause other problems. Seepage for information on tapeplayer care and protection.

237

Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

REPEAT Caring for the Tape Player

SKIP

Features


267

NOTE:

06/12/06 11:04:24 32SMR600_270

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labelledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.


When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centreto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the disc to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

General Information Protecting Discs

Features

Protecting Your Discs

268

06/12/06 11:04:34 32SMR600_271

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM, AM (MW),LW, disc (if a disc is loaded), or atape (if equipped). You can selectFM1 and FM2 when the auto selectfeature is not used.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press and release thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset station on theband you are listening to. Press andrelease the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous station.

To activate the seek function, pressand hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )of the CH button until you hear a

beep. The system searches up ordown from the current frequency tofind a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack file in MP3 or WMA modeeach time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track or file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track or file.You will see the track number (filenumber in MP3 or WMA mode) andthe elapsed time. On vehicles withnavigation system, the informationshows in the side display.

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep, toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

CONTINUED

Features

Remote Audio Controls (For some types)

269

CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

06/12/06 11:04:42 32SMR600_272

＋

－

If you are playing a tape in theoptional tape player, press the top( ) of the CH button to advance tothe next selection. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousselection. The system senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

On vehicles with audio system(without navigation system)

Remote Audio Controls, Setting the Clock

Features

Setting the Clock

270

MINUTE BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

HOUR BUTTON


06/12/06 11:04:48 32SMR600_273

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock.

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

To set the time, press the CLOCK(AM/FM) button until the clockdisplay begins to blink, then releasethe button. The displayed timebegins to blink.

Change the hour by pressing the H(preset 1) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minute by pressing the M(preset 2) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theCLOCK button until you hear a beep,then pressing the R (preset 3) buttonsets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, the clock sets forwardto the beginning of the next hour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

CONTINUED

On vehicles with navigation system

Setting the Clock

Features 271

06/12/06 11:04:56 32SMR600_274

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock.

To set the time, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position todisplay the time.

Change the hour by pressing the Hbutton until the numbers advance tothe desired time. Change the minuteby pressing the M button until the

numbers advance to the desired time.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing the Rbutton sets the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

On vehicles without audio system

Setting the Clock

Features272

HOURBUTTON

MINUTEBUTTON

RESETBUTTON

06/12/06 11:05:03 32SMR600_275

To turn off an alarming systembefore 30 seconds have elapsed,unlock the driver’s door with theignition key or the remotetransmitter.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds (the beeping alarmon vehicles with ultrasonic sensor)and the turn signal lights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio displayunit. This alarm continues for 30seconds, then the system resets.

To set the ultrasonic sensor alongwith the security system, you shouldlock the doors and the tailgate withthe key or the remote transmitter.

The security system setsautomatically 15 seconds (25seconds on vehicles equipped withthe ultrasonic sensor activated) afteryou lock the doors, bonnet, andtailgate. For the system to activate,you must lock the doors and thetailgate from the outside with thekey or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

On vehicles with the ultrasonicsensor, only the remote transmittercan turn off the security system.Unlocking the driver’s door with thekey cannot turn off the securitysystem and activates the alarm.

CONTINUED

Security System (For some types)

Features 273


06/12/06 11:05:10 32SMR600_276

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The alarm will also be activated ifthe passenger inside the lockedvehicle turns the ignition switch on.

When you set the super lockingalong with the security system, thealarm is not activated if someonetries to open a door with the locktabs or the master door lock switch.

When you lock the doors and thetailgate with the key or the remotetransmitter, all outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel flash three times to verify thedoors and the tailgate are locked andthe security system has set. Whenyou unlock them, these lights flashonce.

The security system also sets afteryou lock the doors and the tailgatewith the lock tab or master door lockswitch on the driver’s door whilepulling the outside door handle.

Once the security system is set,opening either door or tailgate(without using the key or the remotetransmitter), or the bonnet, willcause it to alarm. It also alarms if theaudio unit is removed from thedashboard or the wiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe bonnet, tailgate, or either door isnot fully closed. If the system will notset, check the door and tailgate openmonitor on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ), to see if thedoors and tailgate are fully closed.Since it is not part of the monitordisplay, manually check the bonnet.

99

On vehicles with super locking system


Features274

06/12/06 11:05:17 32SMR600_277

The ultrasonic sensor is onlyactivated when the security systemis set by the key or the remotetransmitter. It monitors the interiorof the vehicle and activates the alarmif someone intrudes into thepassenger compartment through awindow, or moves in thecompartment. With the securitysystem set, only the ultrasonicsensor may activate.

You can set the security systemwithout activating the ultrasonicsensor. Pull the driver’s outside doorhandle and push the lock tab in.Release the handle, then close thedoor. The security system indicatoron the instrument panel comes onfor 3 seconds, then starts blinking.

If you set the security system withthe windows open, the ultrasonicsensor may activate the alarmunexpectedly when the systemsenses strong vibrations on thevehicle or loud sound.

Whether the ultrasonic sensor isactivated or not, the security systemcan only be turned off by the remotetransmitter, not the key.

Ultrasonic Sensor(For some types)

Features


275

ULTRASONIC SENSORS

06/12/06 11:05:24 32SMR600_278

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 40 km/h (25 mph)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openmotorways. It is not recommendedfor city driving, winding roads,slippery roads, heavy rain, or badweather.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control (For some types)

Features276

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen travelling on openmotorways in good weather.

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

CRUISEBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

06/12/06 11:05:32 32SMR600_279

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph).

Push on the accelerator pedal untilyou reach the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1.6 km/h (1 mph).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes cruise control tocancel.

Changing the Set Speed


Features 277

06/12/06 11:05:41 32SMR600_280

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 40 km/h (25 mph), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on, and the vehicle willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed


Features278

06/12/06 11:05:48 32SMR600_281

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

HFT system recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFTsystem. The HFT system uses aClass 2 Bluetooth, which means themaximum range between yourphone and vehicle is 10 meters (30feet).

With a linked phone, the HFTsystem allows you to send andreceive calls in your vehicle withoutholding the phone.

Here are the main features of theHFT system. Instructions for usingthe HFT system begin on page .

The available language is set toEnglish as the default setting whenyour vehicle leaves the factory. Thevoice of the HFT system is set tofemale.

Your vehicle is equipped with theHands-Free Telephone (HFT)system. HFT system uses Bluetoothtechnology as a wireless linkbetween it and your Bluetoothcompatible mobile phone. When youare in your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFT system, you’llenjoy hands-free phone use. TheHFT system is available in any of thefive languages; English, French,Italian, German, and Spanish. Tochange the language, see page .

To use the HFT system, your phonemust have approved Bluetoothcapability along with the Hands FreeProfile. This type of phone isavailable through many phonemakers and network operators.

294

281

281

Optional on vehicles with navigationsystem

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Voice Control

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Hands-Free Telephone (HFT) System (For some types)

Features 279

06/12/06 11:05:57 32SMR600_282

The HFT system can store up to 50names and phone numbers in itsphonebook. With a linked phone, youcan then automatically dial any nameor number in the phonebook.

Here are the main components ofthe HFT system:

The HFT system microphone is onthe ceiling console. The microphoneis shared with the navigation system.

When the HFT system is in use, thesound comes through the vehicle’sfront audio system speakers. If theaudio system is in use whileoperating either of HFT buttons ormaking a call, the HFT system over-rides the audio system. To changethe volume level, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To operate the HFT, use the HFTTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. Below theHFT buttons is another set of voicecontrol buttons for the navigation,climate control, and audio systems.

Here is the function of each HFTbutton:

HFT Talk: This button is usedbefore you give a command, toanswer incoming calls, and toconfirm system information.

HFT Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

Phonebook

Microphone

Audio System

HFT Buttons

Features


280

HFT BACK BUTTON

HFTTALKBUTTON

06/12/06 11:06:06 32SMR600_283

CONTINUED

When you are operating the HFTyou are dialing and receiving calls,you will see ‘‘TEL’’ on the sidedisplay.

‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed ifyour phone is linked to the Bluetoothcompatible cell phone.

The HFT system is operated by theHFT Talk and Back buttons on theleft side of the steering wheel. Thenext few pages provide instructionsfor all basic features of the HFTsystem.

All phones may not operateidentically, and some may causeinconsistent operation of the HFTsystem.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

To enter a command, press theTalk button. Then, after the beep,say your command in a clear,natural tone.

For best system operation, set theclimate control fan speed to low,and direct the centre vents awayfrom the microphone in the ceiling.

If the HFT system does notrecognize a command, itsresponse is, ‘‘Pardon.’’ If it doesn’trecognize the command a secondtime, its response is, ‘‘Pleaserepeat.’’ If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a third time, it plays theHelp prompt.

Features


Information Display How to Use the HFT System Using Voice Control

281

NOTE:

06/12/06 11:06:16 32SMR600_284

The incoming notification of theHFT system can be set to a ring tone,a prompt, or no notification.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree link help.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, or 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFT systemis speaking. The HFT system willthen begin listening for your nextcommand.

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFTsystem is listening for a command,

the HFT system will time out andstop its voice recognition. Thenext time you press the Talkbutton, the HFT system beginslistening from the point at which ittimed out.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Systemoptions are setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Wouldyou like an audible notification ofan incoming call?’’

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’The next time you press the Talkbutton, the HFT system beginsfrom its main menu.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFT system goesback to its main menu. Forexample, when you store the name,‘‘Eric,’’ the HFT system responseis, ‘‘Eric has been stored.’’ Thenext time you press the Talkbutton, you will be at the mainmenu.

1.

2.

To set up the system, do this:

Features

Setting Up the System


282

06/12/06 11:06:26 32SMR600_285

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFT system response is, ‘‘Wouldyou like the notification to be aring tone or a prompt?’’ If you say‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFTsystem returns to its main menu.Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no ringtone or prompt playback during anincoming call. The audio systemwill be mute, and a message willbe displayed.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘A ring tone will beused.’’ or ‘‘An incoming callprompt will be used.’’

Follow the system setupprocedure from the step 1 throughthe step 5 as described previously.

The HFT system will accept anumeric, four-digit password thatyou can use for security purposes.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

The HFT system response is‘‘What is the four digit numberyou would like to set as yourpassword?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpassword you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFTsystem response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Isthis correct?’’

If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you willhear a ring tone through the audiospeakers to announce an incomingcall. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ youwill hear this message toannounce an incoming call: ‘‘You

have an incoming call.’’

The HFT system responsecontinues ‘‘A security option isavailable to lock the hands freesystem. Each time the vehicle isturned on, a password would berequired to use this system. Wouldyou like this security option turnedon?’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘No’’ after the beep, theHFT system response is, ‘‘Securitywill not be used. The system setupis complete.’’

If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set yourpassword. Refer to the settingprocedure in the next column.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

3.

4.

6.

To set your password, do this:


Features

Setting Your Password

283

06/12/06 11:06:37 32SMR600_286

For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFT system.

HFT system does not allow you topair your phone if the vehicle ismoving.

The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFT systemwith this procedure, refer to yourphone’s operating manual, or talkto your phone retailer.During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFT system before youcan make and receive hands-freecalls.

If you forget your password and youcannot activate the HFT system,consult your dealer to cancel thepassword.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpassword. For example, say ‘‘1, 2,3, 4.’’

If the password is correct, theHFT system response is ‘‘Mainmenu.’’

If the password is not correct, theHFT system response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4 isincorrect. Please try again.’’ Go backto the step 2.

The HFT system will prompt youfor your password each time theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and you press theTalk button. You will only beasked for the password once perignition cycle. If the password isset, its response is ‘‘The system islocked. What is the four-digitpassword?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Thesystem is now locked. Each timethe vehicle is turned on, thepassword will be required to usethe system. The system setup iscomplete. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Once a password is set, you can lockthe HFT system so it only operatesafter the password is entered.

1.

2.

3.

5.

To enter your password, do this:

Features


NOTE:

Pairing Your Phone

284

06/12/06 11:06:49 32SMR600_287

CONTINUED

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘Phone set up optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Thepairing process requires operationof your mobile phone. For safety,only perform this function whilethe vehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this

correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is‘‘Searching for a Bluetooth phone.Make sure the phone you aretrying to pair is in discovery mode.’’

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘A new phone hasbeen found. What would you liketo name this phone?’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Search mode. Thephone will search for the HFTsystem. When it comes up, selectHands-Free Telephone Systemfrom the list of options displayedon your phone.

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Features


285

NOTE:

06/12/06 11:06:58 32SMR600_288

To rename a paired phone, do this:

To delete a paired phone, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Phone setup options are status,pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Whichphone would you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFT system response is‘‘What is the new name for Eric’sphone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Wouldyou like to delete Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is‘‘Preparing to delete Eric’s phone.’’Say ‘‘OK’’ to continue. Otherwise,say ‘‘Go back,’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFT system response is ‘‘Thephone has been deleted. Returningto the main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Goback,’’ or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone willnot be deleted.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘The name has beenchanged. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFT system response is,‘‘Phone setup options are status,pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whichphone would you like to delete?’’

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Features


286

06/12/06 11:07:07 32SMR600_289

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Phone setup options are status,pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFT system responds by listingthe name of each paired phone.When all phones paired to thesystem have been read, the HFTsystem response is ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Phone setup options are status,pair, edit, delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘Eric’s phone is linked.Battery strength is three bars.Signal strength is five bars, andthe phone is roaming. Returning tothe main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Searching for the next phone.’’The HFT system then disconnectsthe linked phone and searches foranother paired phone. If no otherphones are found, the first phoneremains linked.

Some phones do not send thestatus information to the HFTsystem.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

Features


287

06/12/06 11:07:15 32SMR600_290

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFT system phonebook. You canalso redial the last number called.During a call, the HFT system allowsyou to talk up to 30 minutes after youremove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call,dial, or continue to add numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Calling’’ or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT system responseis ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Calling’’or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.

3.

To make a call using a name in the HFTsystem phonebook, do this:

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

Making a Call

Features


288

06/12/06 11:07:25 32SMR600_291

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFT system responseis, ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

The HFT system allow you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFT system phonebook for easyretrieval during menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname or number would you like tosend?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname or number would you like tosend?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFTsystem response is ‘‘Would youlike to send account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

4.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

3.

To send a number during a call, do this:

To send a name during a call, do this:

Features


Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

289

06/12/06 11:07:34 32SMR600_292

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFT systeminterrupts the audio system (if it ison), and plays the incoming callnotification, if activated. To answerthe call, press the Talk button andbegin speaking. If you don’t want toanswer the call, press the Backbutton.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFT system to your phone,or from your phone to the HFTsystem.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from the HFTsystem to the phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from yourphone to the HFT system.

1.

2.

To transfer a call from the HFT systemto your phone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFT system, do this:


Features

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call

290

06/12/06 11:07:43 32SMR600_293

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Mute isactive.’’

The HFT system phonebook canstore up to 50 names with theirassociated numbers. These can beany types of numbers. For example,you can store a phone number anduse it to make a call, or you can storea name tag and use it to call.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFT system response is‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname would you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’. The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘What is the numberfor Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFT system response is ‘‘123456 7891.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Mute iscancelled.’’

1.

1.

2.

2.

3.

4.

To mute your voice, do this:

To add a name, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

CONTINUED

Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook

Features


291

06/12/06 11:07:54 32SMR600_294

To edit the number of a name, do this:

To delete a name, do this:To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Eric hasbeen stored. Returning to the mainmenu.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname would you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘What is the newnumber for Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Thenumber has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFT system response is,‘‘Phonebook options are store, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Whatname would you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFT systemresponse is ‘‘Would you like todelete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Thename has been deleted. Returningto the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFT system response is,‘‘The Phonebook options are store,edit, delete, and list.’’

5.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.


Features292

06/12/06 11:08:04 32SMR600_295

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFT system responds by listingthe names in the phonebook.When the end of the list isreached, the HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘The entire list hasbeen read. Returning to the mainmenu.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFT system responds by listingthe names in the phonebook.When it says the name you want tocall, for example, Eric, press theTalk button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’The HFT system response is,

‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is ‘‘Calling.’’Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

This operation clears the HFTsystem of your password, yourpaired phones, and all names in theHFT system phonebook. Clearing isrecommended before you sell yourvehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Systemoptions are setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFT system response is, ‘‘Thisprocess will clear all paired phones,clear all entries in the phonebook,and clear the password andrestore the defaults in the systemsetup. Is this what you would liketo do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFT system response is‘‘Preparing to clear all pairedphones, all phonebook entries, andthe password, and restore thedefaults in the system setup. Thismay take up to 2 minutes tocomplete.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed,otherwise say ‘‘Go back’’ or‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFT systemresponse is, ‘‘System has beencleared. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

To clear the system, do this:


Clearing the System

Features 293

06/12/06 11:08:14 32SMR600_296

？

？

＜＞

＜＞

To select any of the five languages;English, French, Italian, German, andSpanish, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFT systemresponse is English, French,Italian, German, or Spanish

For example, change from English toFrench.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ TheHFT system response in the newselecting language is ‘‘You haveselected French. Name tags thatwere stored while in anotherlanguage will not be accessible inFrench mode. Would you like tocontinue ’’, then the systemrepeats the response in thecurrently selected language.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ in theselected language (in French inthis example). If there are nopaired phones without Frenchname tags, the HFT systemresponse in the selected languageis ‘‘The language has beenchanged,’’ then ‘‘Returning to themain menu.’’ After this response,the system recognizes yourcommands in the selectedlanguage only.

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFTsystem response in the selectedlanguage is ‘‘For the system toidentify phones that were pairedwhile in another language, thephone names need to be re-recorded.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

The HFT system response in theselected language is, for example,‘‘What is the French name for

Paul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone’’ in theselected language. The HFTsystem response is, ‘‘What is theFrench name for Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. Say ‘‘Pat’s phone.’’After all paired phones missing aFrench name tag are re-recorded,the HFT system will prompt in theselected language, ‘‘Returning tothe main menu.’’

1.

2.

3. 4.Changing Language


Features294

NOTE:

06/12/06 11:08:23 32SMR600_297

？

？

＜＞

＜＞

To change from French to English, dothis:

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage’’ in the currently selectedlanguage. The HFT systemresponse in the currently selectedlanguage is, ‘‘English, French,German, Italian, or Spanish ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘English’’ inthe currently selected language.The HFT system response in thenew selecting language is, ‘‘Youhave selected English. Name tagsthat were stored while in Frenchmode will not be accessible inEnglish mode. Would you like tocontinue ’’, then the systemrepeats the response in thecurrently selected language.

The HFT system says, forexample, ‘‘What is the Englishname for Paul’s phone ?’’ Pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone’’ in theselected language. The HFT

system response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Pat’s phone.’’ After all pairedphones missing an English nametag are re-recorded, the HFTsystem will say ‘‘Returning to themain menu.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFT systemresponse is ‘‘The language has beenchanged. For the system to identifyphones that were paired while inanother language, the phone namesneed to be re-recorded.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ in the

selected language. If there are nopaired phones without Englishname tags, the HFT systemresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’ in the selectedlanguage.

4.

1.

2.

3.

Features


295

NOTE:

06/12/06 11:08:30 32SMR600_298

？

Hereby,declares that this

is in compliancewith the essential requirements andother relevant provisions of Directive1999/5/EC.

www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/EU_DoC.pdf

For additional conformanceinformation: www.jciblueconnect.com/faq

When using voice control, the HFTsystem call is placed on hold, or theHFT system stops its voicerecognition. The HFT system callwill continue when voice controlcommand is ended. To operate theHFT system again, press the Talkbutton. Then after the beep, say theappropriate command.

In addition, you cannot use the HFTsystem while receiving a PTY alarm.

For example, change from English toFrench.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French’’ inthe selecting language. In this case,say in French.

If you want to continue, followsteps 3 and 4 in page .

The HFT system response in thenew selecting language is ‘‘Youhave selected French. Name tagsthat were stored while in anotherlanguage will not be accessible inFrench mode. Would you like tocontinue ’’ The system alsorepeats the response in thecurrently selected language.

1.

2.

3.294

Johnson Controls Automotive,Hands-Free

Telephone System

For information of DoC(Declaration of Conformance)To select a language quickly, do the

following.EU models

Except EU models


Features

HFT System LimitationsQuick Language Selection

296

06/12/06 11:08:41 32SMR600_299

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know what fuelto use and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 298.................Fuel Recommendation . 298

............................Petrol models . 298

............................Diesel models . 299.........Service Station Procedures . 299

....................................Refueling . 299Opening and Closing

.............................the Bonnet . 301...................................Oil Check . 302

.............Engine Coolant Check . 304........................Fuel Cutoff Switch . 306

...............................Fuel Economy . 307...Accessories and Modifications . 308

.........................Carrying Luggage . 310

Before Driving

Before Driving 297

06/12/06 11:08:44 32SMR600_300

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 1,000 km (625 miles).During this period:

Avoid hard braking for the first300 km (200 miles).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Petrol of the recommendedResearch Octane Number (RON)may not be available in some areas.In this case, petrol of a lower octanemay be used temporarily if it doesnot cause engine ‘‘knocking.’’ Thiswill result in decreased engineperformance.

Using petrol containing lead willdamage your vehicle’s emissions con-trols and engine. This contributes toair pollution.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon Premium/Super unleaded petrolwith a Research Octane Number(RON) of 95 or higher.

Break-in Period Fuel RecommendationPetrol models

Before Driving

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

298

06/12/06 11:08:53 32SMR600_301

Your vehicle is designed to use onlyDiesel Fuel (also known asAutomotive gas oil and Derv).

Your vehicle is not designed to useRME (Rapeseed Methyl Ester). Formore information, ask your dealer.

The quality of diesel fuel (Derv) canvary in different countries, and onlyclean and good quality fuel should beused.

You need to use the proper fuel forEN590 and also vary the fueldepending on the season.

Park with the left side closest tothe service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingthe upper handle under the lowercorner of the dashboard.

Serious damage may occur if petrolis used in diesel engines.

Select the proper fuel according tothe regional or climate condition.Use of inadequate fuel may reduceengine power. In this case, thesymbol ‘‘ ’’ may appear on themulti-information display.

For proper fuel selection, ‘‘DIESEL’’is marked on the fuel fill cap.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Diesel models Refueling

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 299

06/12/06 11:09:04 32SMR600_302

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.

Place the fuel fill cap in the holderon the fuel fill door. To preventthe fuel fill cap from becoming lost,it is attached to the fuel filler witha tether.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

4.

5.

6.

3.

Before Driving

Service Station Procedures

300

Fuel is highly flammable andexplosive. You can be burnedor seriously injured whenhandling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flameaway.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

TETHER

HOLDER

TETHER

HOLDER

Petrol models

Diesel models

06/12/06 11:09:13 32SMR600_303

Put your fingers between the frontedge of the bonnet and the frontgrille. The bonnet latch handle isabove the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push thishandle up to release the bonnet.Lift the bonnet.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the bonnetrelease handle under the lowercorner of the dashboard. Thebonnet will pop up slightly.

If the bonnet latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open thebonnet without lifting the handle,the mechanism should be cleanedand lubricated.

Pull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip, and insert theend into the designated hole in thebonnet.

1. 2. 3.

CONTINUED

Opening and Closing the Bonnet


Before Driving 301

BONNET RELEASE HANDLE LATCH GRIP CLIP

SUPPORT ROD

06/12/06 11:09:22 32SMR600_304

To close the bonnet, lift it up slightlyto remove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the bonnet toabout 30 cm (a foot) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Do not press the engine coverforcibly. This may damage theengine cover and component parts.

All engines consume oil as part oftheir normal operation, therefore,the engine oil level must be checkedregularly, for example whenrefuelling. Always check the oilbefore a long journey.

The amount of oil consumeddepends on how the vehicle is drivenand the climatic and road conditionsencountered. The rate of oilconsumption can be up to 1 litre per1,000 km/625 miles. Consumption islikely to be higher when the engineis new.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Make sure the engine is warmed upand the vehicle is parked on levelground. Turn off the engine and waitapproximately 3 minutes beforechecking the oil level.

1.

On Diesel models


Before Driving

Oil Check

302

DIPSTICK

Petrol models except Type-R

06/12/06 11:09:30 32SMR600_305

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Remove the dipstick carefully, soyou do not spill the oil. Spilled oilcould damage components in theengine compartment.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED


Before Driving 303

Diesel models DIPSTICK

LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

Petrol models except Type-RType-R model

DIPSTICK(Black handle)

06/12/06 11:09:39 32SMR600_306

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page

on petrol models, on dieselmodels.368 370

372


Before Driving

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Adding Engine Oil On petrol models

304

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

Diesel models

MAX MIN

RESERVE TANKPetrol models

LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

Type-R model

06/12/06 11:09:46 32SMR600_307

The coolant level in the expansiontank should be checked only whenthe engine and the cooling systemare cold. Make sure it is between theMAX and MIN lines. If it is belowthe MIN line, see

on page .

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

374

356


Before Driving

On Diesel models

Adding EngineCoolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

305

EXPANSION TANK

MAX LINEMIN LINE

Diesel models

06/12/06 11:09:52 32SMR600_308

The fuel cutoff switch is behind thedriver’s side corner vent. To accessthe switch:

After the switch has activated, itmust be reset by pressing the buttonbefore the engine can be restarted.

In a collision or sudden impact, thisswitch automatically cuts off the fuelsupply to the engine.

Open the driver’s door.

Pry the lower front side of the sidepanel under the door seal, thenpull out the side panel carefully.

Remove the side panel of thedashboard carefully.

Locate the fuel cutoff switchbehind the corner vent.1.

3.

2.

4.

Before Driving

Fuel Cutoff Switch (For some types)

306

Leaking fuel can ignite orexplode, causing you to beseriously or fatally injured.

Always check for fuel leaksbefore resetting the switch.

SIDE PANEL FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH

06/12/06 11:10:00 32SMR600_309

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

an underinflated tyrecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control (onsome types) when appropriate.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Combine several short trips intoone.

356

For example,

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Fuel Economy

Before Driving 307

06/12/06 11:10:08 32SMR600_310

Your dealer has genuine Hondaaccessories that allow you topersonalize your vehicle. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your vehicle.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows as these may interferewith proper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

471

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving308

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability,and performance, and causea crash in which you can behurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories andmodifications.

06/12/06 11:10:17 32SMR600_311

Larger or smaller wheels and tyrescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Some examples are:

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving 309

06/12/06 11:10:24 32SMR600_312

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor and seat-back pocketsLuggage area, including the rearseats when folded, and under-floorluggage areaConsole compartmentCentre pocketRoof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much luggage,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tyres, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of luggage, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Before Driving

Carrying Luggage

310

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

CENTRE CONSOLE

GLOVE BOX

CENTRE POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKET

LUGGAGE AREA

UNDER-FLOOR LUGGAGE AREA

(P.176)

(P.175)

(P.176)

DOOR POCKET

06/12/06 11:10:33 32SMR600_313

When you load luggage, the totalweight of the vehicle, all passengers,luggage and towbar must not exceedthe maximum permissible weight.The load for the front and rear axlesalso must not exceed the maximumpermissible axle weight.Refer to page for the maximumpermissible weight and maximumpermissible axle weight.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, and proper operation of theseats. Do not stack items higherthan the back of the front seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

When you load luggage, the totalweight of the vehicle, all passengersand luggage must not exceed themaximum loaded vehicle weight.Refer to page for the maximumloaded vehicle weight.

488

488

On Australian model

Load Limits Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Luggage

Before Driving 311

Overloading or improperloading can affect handlingand stability and cause acrash in which you can behurt or killed.

Follow all load limits andother loading guidelines inthis manual.

06/12/06 11:10:40 32SMR600_314

Distribute luggage evenly on thefloor of the luggage area, placingthe heaviest items on the bottomand as far forward as possible.Try to secure the items with ropeor cord so they will not shift whileyou are driving.

Try to secure the items with ropeor cord so they will not shift whileyou are driving. Do not stackitems higher than the back of thefront seats.

Refer to page for folding rearseats.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Do not place items on the luggagearea cover, or stack objects higherthan the top of the back seat. Theycould block your view and bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Concerning means of lashing andretaining devices offered on theaccessory market, please contactyour dealer.

A normal bike rack must not befitted to the tailgate.65

164

Carrying Luggage

Before Driving

Carrying Luggage in the LuggageArea or on a Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

312

06/12/06 11:10:49 32SMR600_315

To secure luggage, use the four floorhooks in the luggage area. Makesure all stored items are securedbefore driving.

These hooks are also used to installa net for securing a flat tyre (seepage ).439

On vehicles with spare tyre

Carrying Luggage

Before Driving

Luggage Hooks

313

06/12/06 11:10:55 32SMR600_316

314

06/12/06 11:10:57 32SMR600_317

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and i-SHIFT transmissions. Italso includes important informationon parking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the vehicle stability assist(VSA) system, and facts you need ifyou are planning to tow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 316

........................Preparing to Drive . 317Starting the Engine

(Petrol models with manual........................transmission) . 318

Starting the Engine (Petrol...............models with i-SHIFT) . 319

Starting the Engine.........................(Diesel models) . 320

...................Manual Transmission . 322i-SHIFT (Automated Manual

...........................Transmission) . 326...........................................Parking . 337

.............................Braking System . 338...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 339

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 341

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 343...........................Towing a Trailer . 345

Driving

Driving 315

06/12/06 11:11:01 32SMR600_318

Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average vehicle may behigh enough to hit the bumper onyour vehicle. The front or rearbumper may scrape when trying todrive onto an incline, such as asteep driveway or trailer ramps.

Your vehicle is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your vehicle has aminimum of ground clearance.

Use caution if you ever drive yourvehicle on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ canalso cause damage.

Driving Guidelines

Driving316

06/12/06 11:11:06 32SMR600_319

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the bonnet is fullyclosed.

Check that the tailgate is fullyclosed.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Visually check the tyres. If a tyrelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

17

1.

2.

3.

4.

6.

7.

8.

9.5.

11.

10.

72

160

172

147

Preparing to Drive

Driving 317

06/12/06 11:11:16 32SMR600_320

§

Push the clutch pedal down all theway and shift the transmission toneutral.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

Turn the ignition key to the ON(II) position.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, push the ENGINE STARTbutton. Do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 15seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled. See

on page .

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 6.

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air foundat altitudes above 2,400 meters(8,000 feet) adds to this problem.

If the outside temperature is belowfreezing, or if your vehicle has notbeen driven for several days, warmup the engine for a few minutesbefore driving (prohibited inGermany! 30 StVO).

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 5 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfway

down. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

3.

4.

5.

2.

6.

7.

149

Starting the Engine (Petrol models)

Driving

Manual Transmission

ImmobilizerSystem

318

ENGINE STARTBUTTON

06/12/06 11:11:27 32SMR600_321

§


on page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air foundat altitudes above 2,400 meters(8,000 feet) adds to this problem.

If the outside temperature is belowfreezing, or if your vehicle has notbeen driven for several days, warmup the engine for a few minutesbefore driving (prohibited inGermany! 30 StVO).

Make sure the shift lever is inneutral (N) with the brake pedalpressed, and the gear positionindicator shows N. If the shiftlever is not in neutral (N) positionor the brake pedal is not pressed,you cannot start the engine.

Turn the ignition key to the ON(II) position.

Press on the brake pedal andmove the shift lever to neutral.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.


Without touching the acceleratorpedal, push the ENGINE STARTbutton. Do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 15

seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

Make sure the gear positionindicator shows the appropriate gearposition before driving the vehicle.

1.

3.

4.

5.

2.

149

i-SHIFT (Automated ManualTransmission)

ImmobilizerSystem

Starting the Engine (Petrol models)

Driving 319

ENGINE STARTBUTTON

06/12/06 11:11:37 32SMR600_322


Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway and shift the transmission toneutral.

Turn the ignition key to the ON(II) position. Wait until the glowplugs indicator turns off.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, push the ENGINE STARTbutton. Do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 15seconds at a time (20 seconds incold weather). If the engine doesnot start right away, pause for atleast 20 seconds before tryingagain.

In very cold climates the batterycharging and oil pressure indicatorsmay take several seconds to go off.Similarly, engine cranking times willalso increase.

In the interests of fuel economy, it isadvisable to start driving straightaway, remembering that harshacceleration or labouring the enginebefore the normal operatingtemperature has been reached candamage the engine.


on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

149

Cold Climates

Warming Up

ImmobilizerSystem

Starting the Engine (Diesel models)

Driving320

ENGINE STARTBUTTON

06/12/06 11:11:47 32SMR600_323

The engine must not be run abovefast idle speed until the oilpressure warning indicator goesoff. This will ensure that theengine and turbocharger bearingsare properly lubricated beforebeing run at normal driving speeds.

To avoid the possibility of damagingthe turbocharger bearings throughinadequate lubrication, ALWAYSallow the engine to idle for 10seconds before turning off theengine.

Ignition Switching Off

Starting the Engine (Diesel models)

Driving 321

06/12/06 11:11:52 32SMR600_324

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift fromany forward gear to reverse whilethe vehicle is moving at a certainspeed (see page ).

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest your

foot on the clutch pedal. This cancause excessive clutch wear.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear. Refer to themaximum allowable speeds charts.

325

Manual Transmission

Driving322

Rapid slowing or speeding-up can cause loss of controlon slippery surfaces. If youcrash, you can be injured.

Use extra care when drivingon slippery surfaces.

06/12/06 11:11:59 32SMR600_325

Do not rest your hand on the shiftlever while driving; Pressuretransmitted from your hand maycause premature wear to gearselector mechanism.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Your vehicle is equipped with analuminium shift lever. If you leavethe vehicle parked outside for a longtime on a hot day, be careful beforemoving the shift lever. Because ofthe heat, the shift lever may beextremely hot. If the outsidetemperature is low, the shift leverfeels cold.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Your vehicle has the rev indicator toshow you approaching to thetachometer’s red zone while driving(see page ).

Normal acceleration

15 km/h (9 mph)35 km/h (22 mph)50 km/h (31 mph)75 km/h (47 mph)

100 km/h (62 mph)

Shift up


Shift up


Normal acceleration

20 km/h (12 mph)30 km/h (19 mph)45 km/h (28 mph)60 km/h (37 mph)75 km/h (47 mph)

Normal acceleration

15 km/h (9 mph)35 km/h (22 mph)55 km/h (34 mph)70 km/h (43 mph)85 km/h (53 mph)

86

On some models1.8 engine model

2.0 engine model (Type-R)

2.2 engine model (diesel)Recommended Shift Points

Manual Transmission

Driving 323

06/12/06 11:12:08 32SMR600_326

＊

＊

The speeds in this table are themaximum allowable speeds in eachgear. If you exceed these speeds, theengine speed will enter into thetachometer’s red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine’s computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure thevehicle will not exceed the maximumallowable speed specified by thechart for the lower gear to avoidengine damage.

Gear

1st2nd3rd4th5th

Maximum allowablespeeds

40 km/h (24 mph)77 km/h (48 mph)

119 km/h (74 mph)161 km/h (100 mph)202 km/h (125 mph)

Gear

1st2nd3rd4th5th


57 km/h (36 mph)97 km/h (60 mph)


Gear

1st2nd3rd4th5th


55 km/h (34 mph)85 km/h (53 mph)


4

4 : The values shown are the speeds when theengine speed is at 4,500 rpm.

1.8 engine model

2.0 engine model (Type-R)

2.2 engine model (diesel)Maximum Allowable Speeds

Manual Transmission

Driving324

06/12/06 11:12:16 32SMR600_327

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

The manual transmission haslockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from any forward gear toreverse while the vehicle is movingat a certain speed. If you cannot shiftto reverse when the vehicle isstopped, do the following.

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

Driving 325

06/12/06 11:12:24 32SMR600_328

Your vehicle’s i-SHIFT (automatedmanual transmission) has sixforward speeds based on the 6-speedmanual transmission, and gearselection and clutch operation areelectronically controlled forsmoother shifting and better fueleconomy. With this i-SHIFT, you canoperate the vehicle in either of thetwo driving modes: automatic andmanual.

In the manual mode, the selectedgear position number is displayednext to the speedometer on theupper display.

If you select the automatic mode,‘‘A’’ is displayed next to thespeedometer on the upper displayand the REV indicator goes out.Pressing either paddle shifter ormoving the shift lever back orforward will cause the transmission

to go into the manual mode. ‘‘A’’ willgo out and the selected gear positionnumber will be displayed.

Pushing the shift lever to the leftside (A/M position) also switchesthe driving mode between theautomatic and manual modes.

In the manual mode, you can shift upor down manually with the shift leveror the paddle shifters, much like a6-speed manual transmission withoutoperating the clutch pedal. In theautomatic mode, the i-SHIFT allowsyou to drive the vehicle just like a6-speed automatic transmission.

i-SHIFT (Automated Manual Transmission)

Driving

Gear Position Indicator

326



Automatic mode is selected.

06/12/06 11:12:32 32SMR600_329

Before starting, make sure the gearposition indicator in the upperdisplay shows you that thetransmission is shifted properly.

If the gear position indicator blinks,the transmission cannot be shifted.Return the shift lever to neutral,pause, then move it again whilepressing the brake pedal.

The shift lever has three positions:neutral, reverse and driving positions.It must be in neutral and the brakepedal must be pressed to start theengine. You must also press on thebrake pedal when you move the shiftlever out from neutral to the drivingposition or reverse.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the segmentdisplay of the gear position indicatorcomes on, then it shows theappropriate shift lever position (A, Nor R). If the battery is not wellcharged or goes dead, you mustmove the shift lever to neutral andpress on the brake pedal for about 3seconds to show the shift leverposition after reconnecting thebattery or jump starting. CONTINUED

Driving


Shifting

327

Upshift

Downshift

DRIVING POSITION

SEGMENT DISPLAY

06/12/06 11:12:40 32SMR600_330

When you are not shifting, do notmove the shift lever. Moving theshift lever can cause thetransmission to shift into neutralunexpectedly or to switch thedriving mode between theautomatic and manual modes.

If it is needed to stop briefly whiledriving, keep the transmission in anygear, press firmly on the brake pedal,and keep your foot off theaccelerator pedal. This prevents thevehicle from moving unexpectedlyand accidentally.

Make sure the gear positionindicator shows you the appropriategear position before starting. Thebrake pedal must be pressed, or thegear position indicator begins toblink and the transmission cannot beshifted.

To select the automatic mode, pushthe shift lever to the left side (A/Mposition) from the driving position. Pulling either of the paddle shifters

also selects the manual mode whenthe shift lever is in the drivingposition.

Push the shift lever forward orbackward from the driving positionto select the manual mode. Movingthe shift lever to the A/M positionalso switches to the manual mode.

With the ignition switch off, youcan move the shift lever, but thetransmission cannot be shifted.

Do not keep the vehicle stoppedby operating the accelerator pedalon an incline. This can damage theclutch system and thetransmission.

Do not press the brake andaccelerator pedals at the sametime. This can damage the clutchsystem and the transmission.


Driving328

PADDLESHIFTER

06/12/06 11:12:48 32SMR600_331

－

CONTINUED

If you move the shift lever fromneutral to the driving position orreverse without pressing the brakepedal, the gear position indicatorbegins to blink and the transmissioncannot be shifted. The controlsystem still allows you to start thevehicle by pressing and releasing thebrake pedal within about 25 seconds.

Make sure the gear positionindicator in the upper displayshows you the appropriate gearposition before starting the vehicle.

Before turning off the engine, thetransmission should be shifted tothe first gear when facing uphill.On a downhill slope, it should be inreverse gear.

If there is a problem in the i-SHIFTcontrol system while you are driving,the i-SHIFT system indicator comeson in the instrument panel. For moreinformation, see page .

As starting the vehicle is assisted bycreeping for smooth operation, youcan start out slowly on level groundwithout pressing the acceleratorpedal firmly. On uphill slopes, thiscreeping is not effective, so alwaysset the parking brake for starting.

To start driving the vehicle, releasethe parking brake and release thebrake pedal gradually, then press theaccelerator pedal slowly.

Use Neutral andpress on the brake pedal wheneveryou start the engine. If the shift leveris not in neutral (N) position or thebrake pedal is not pressed, youcannot start the engine. When youare moving the shift lever fromneutral to another gear, press on thebrake pedal and have your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you need to restart a stalled engine,also use neutral position (see page

for ).

336

456


Driving

Neutral (N)

Jump Starting

329

06/12/06 11:12:56 32SMR600_332

－The i-SHIFT automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 6) for yourspeed and acceleration.

Come to a full stopbefore you shift into reverse. Youcan damage the transmission bytrying to shift into reverse with thevehicle moving.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout toprevent the transmission fromshifting into reverse from anyforward gear. The transmission willnot enter into reverse gear while thevehicle speed is over 3 km/h (2mph) if you move the shift lever toreverse from neutral or any otherforward gear unexpectedly. Do nottry to shift into reverse with thevehicle moving to preventtransmission damage.

Make sure the gear positionindicator shows ‘‘R’’ before startingthe vehicle.

If you cannot shift into any gear fromneutral, the gear position indicatorwill blink in the upper display. Thismeans the transmission is in theneutral position regardless of theshift lever position. If this happens,return the shift lever to the neutralposition, pause, and then move it outfrom neutral while pressing on thebrake pedal.

If the driver’s door is open with theshift lever in the driving position orreverse and the engine running, thealarm sounds continuously and thegear position indicator is blinking.

Do not move the shift lever to theneutral position while driving. Youwill lose engine braking and may losecontrol of the vehicle.

When you start the vehicle, theautomatic mode is selectedautomatically for smooth operation.You will see the ‘‘A’’ indicator in theupper display. While driving, thetransmission automatically upshiftsfrom the lower gear to the highergear and also downshiftsautomatically.

The transmission downshifts to thefirst gear as the vehicle comes to acomplete stop.

When you accelerate from a stop,the transmission starts in the firstgear in the automatic mode. Beforestarting off, make sure the gearposition indicator shows ‘‘A’’ position.


Driving

Driving in Automatic ModeReverse (R)

330

06/12/06 11:13:06 32SMR600_333

－

CONTINUED

To switch the driving mode betweenthe manual and automatic modes,push the shift lever to the left side(A/M position) from the drivingposition. You can also return to themanual mode by pushing the shiftlever forward or backward from thedriving position. Pulling eitherpaddle shifter on the steering wheelalso switches to the manual mode.

In the automatic mode, theautomatic mode indicator (A) isdisplayed in the upper display, andthe REV indicator goes out. If youchange to the manual mode, ‘‘A’’indicator goes out, then the currentlyselected gear position number isdisplayed.

For faster acceleration while driving,you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.

When the control system releasesthe clutch to change a gear, you mayfeel deceleration depending on thedriving conditions.

You will hear a mechanical noise andfeel a vibration when thetransmission shifts up or down. Thisis normal; it is the transmissionshifting mechanically according tothe signals from the control system.

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.To downshift, push the shift leverbackward or pull the left side paddleshifter ( ). This will switch thedriving mode to the manual mode.To return to the automatic mode,push the shift lever to the left side(A/M position).

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Engine Speed Limiter


Driving 331

06/12/06 11:13:14 32SMR600_334

＋－

＋

－

When you select the manual mode,the automatic mode indicator (A) inthe upper display goes out, then thecurrently selected gear positionnumber is displayed. The REVindicator also comes on if the settingis on. To return to the automaticmode, push the shift lever to the leftside from the driving position. Youwill see ‘‘A’’ in the upper display.

Each time you push or pull the shiftlever, or pull either paddle shifter,the transmission shifts one gear upor down. According to the drivingconditions, you can shift up or downmore than two gears at a time.

You can shift up or down manuallywith the shift lever or the paddleshifters. To enter the manual mode,move the shift lever to the A/Mposition, push the shift lever forwardor backward from the drivingposition, or pull either paddle shifterwith the shift lever in the drivingposition.

To shift up, push the shift leverforward. To shift down, pull the shiftlever backward.

You can also shift up or down withthe (right side) or (left side)paddle shifters on each side of thesteering wheel. To shift up, pull theright side paddle shifter ( ). Toshift down, pull the left side paddleshifter ( ).

In the manual mode, thetransmission keeps the selected gearin normal driving. There is noautomatic downshift when you pushthe accelerator pedal to the floor.But if you press the brake and thevehicle slows down to a certainspeed, the transmission downshifts

automatically and selects the suitablegear to prevent the engine fromstalling.

Also, if you try to shift up before theengine speed has reached theallowable engine speed in theselected higher gear, thetransmission will not shift up.

If you try to downshift at a speedthat would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission does not downshift.When the vehicle speed slows tobelow the redline of the selectedlower gear position, the transmissiondownshifts, and the display showsthe selected lower gear positionnumber.


Driving

Driving in Manual Mode

332

06/12/06 11:13:21 32SMR600_335

Maximum Allowable Speeds

Even though your vehicle’s gearoperation is controlled electronically,make sure the vehicle will notexceed the maximum allowablespeed specified in the table beforedownshifting.

The speeds in this table are themaximum allowable speeds in eachgear. If you exceed the maximumspeed for the gear you are in, theengine speed will enter into thetachometer’s red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine’s computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.

When you accelerate from a stop,the transmission starts in the firstgear, and you must manually upshiftbetween first and sixth gears.Downshifting also gives you morepower when climbing. Make sureyou upshift before the engine speedreaches the tachometer’s red zone.

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before down shifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

Do not drive in the higher gearswhen the vehicle speed is low.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effectiveemissions control.

The transmission downshifts to thefirst gear when the vehicle comes toa complete stop. Also it downshiftsautomatically to the first gear whenthe vehicle speed reaches about 5km/h (3 mph) or less.

CONTINUED


Driving 333

Rapid acceleration ordeceleration can cause lossof control on slipperysurfaces, and you can beinjured in a crash.

Use extra care when drivingon slippery surfaces.

06/12/06 11:13:29 32SMR600_336

＋

Make sure to set the parking brakewhen starting off on an incline.

To start the vehicle in second gear,start the engine, then push the shiftlever forward once from the drivingposition or press the right sidepaddle shifter ( ) on the steeringwheel once. Make sure the gearposition indicator on the upperdisplay shows ‘‘2’’ before starting out.Starting out in the second gear willhelp to reduce wheel spin in deepsnow or on a slippery surface.

When you stop the vehicle withthe engine running on an uphillslope, never keep the vehiclestopped by operating theaccelerator pedal. This will causeexcessive clutch wear and damagethe clutch system and thetransmission.

Do not try to keep the vehicleposition on an uphill slope by usingthe stop-and-go operation. Thiscan damage the clutch system.


57 km/h (36 mph)97 km/h (60 mph)


Gear

1st2nd3rd4th5th

Starting in Second Gear1.8 engine model


Driving

Driving on Hills

334

06/12/06 11:13:37 32SMR600_337

CONTINUED

Come to a complete stop and alwaysset the parking brake when you parkthe vehicle.

To stop briefly with the engine idling,keep the transmission in any gear,press firmly on the brake pedal, andkeep your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Before moving away, make sure thegear position indicator in the upperdisplay shows you the appropriategear position.

If you press the brake pedal and thevehicle slows down to a certainspeed, the control system releasesthe clutch and downshifts to a lowergear to prevent the engine fromstalling.

Before turning off the engine, makesure the gear position indicator inthe upper display shows you ‘‘A’’ or‘‘1’’ on an uphill slope. On a downhillslope, make sure the gear positionshows ‘‘R.’’ For more information onparking tips, see page .

If the outside temperature is verylow, the transmission may notdownshift from the second gear tothe first gear while driving.

The transmission cannot bedownshifted while the vehiclestability assist system (VSA) isactivated (see page ).

When the system receives the signalfrom ABS sensors that your vehicleis making a turn, the transmissiondoes not upshift in the automaticdriving mode.

If your vehicle gets stuck, ‘‘Rocking’’your vehicle between forward andreverse gear or revving up theengine and allowing the wheels tospin freely at high speeds candamage the i-SHIFT transmission.Use a tow service to preventtransmission damage (see page ).

337

341

479


Driving

ParkingBraking or Stopping

Additional Driving Tips

335

06/12/06 11:13:46 32SMR600_338

If this indicator comes on and stayson while driving (in any gearposition), there may be problems inthe i-SHIFT control system oroverheating of the clutch system. Ifthis happens, avoid rapidacceleration, frequently shifting, anddriving at high speed, and have thevehicle checked by your dealer assoon as possible.

If the gear position indicator doesnot show the appropriate gearposition, you cannot continue driving.See on page

.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this indicatorcomes on and off repeatedly innormal driving.

Driving with the i-SHIFT systemindicator on can cause seriousdamage to the transmission and theclutch system.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message in the multi-information display (see page ).

If this indicator comes on whiledriving due to the clutch systemoverheating, it goes off when theclutch system temperature comesdown. If this indicator goes off whiledriving to your dealer, you cancontinue driving normally.

The symbol/message in the multi-information display also goes offalong with the i-SHIFT systemindicator.

106

479


Driving

i-SHIFT (AutomatedManual Transmission)System Indicator

Emergency Towing

336

06/12/06 11:13:54 32SMR600_339

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Make sure the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the luggage area or take themwith you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot catalyticconverter could cause thesematerials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb, and put the transmission infirst gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb, and put the transmission inreverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Never install a sunshade betweenthe upper and lower displays on theinstrument panel. If you do, youcould cause heat damage to theupper display on a very hot day.

Before turning off the engine, makesure the gear position indicator inthe upper display shows you theappropriate gear position.

On vehicles with security system


Parking

Parking Tips

Driving 337

06/12/06 11:14:05 32SMR600_340

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

All four disc brakes have audiblebrake pad wear indicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear disc brakes. A power assisthelps reduce the effort needed onthe brake pedal. The ABS helps youretain steering control when brakingvery hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, increases wear, and reducestheir effectiveness. It also keepsyour brake lights on all the time,confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces theireffectiveness. Use the engine toassist the brakes by taking your footoff the accelerator and downshiftingto a lower gear.

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System

Driving338

06/12/06 11:14:13 32SMR600_341

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave your dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On dry road,you will need to press on the brakepedal very hard before the ABSactivates. However, you may feel theABS activate immediately if you aretrying to stop on snow or ice.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

470

CONTINUED

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

ABS Indicator

339

06/12/06 11:14:22 32SMR600_342

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

470

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS cannot prevent the loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Driving340

06/12/06 11:14:28 32SMR600_343

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes. When VSA activates, you will see the

VSA Activation indicator blink.

If the VSA system is off and youaccelerate from a stop, the vehiclemay pull, and it may take extra effortto return the steering wheel tocentre.

The VSA system indicator (see page) comes on and stays on when

there is a problem with the VSAsystem. The VSA activation indicatorwill also come on.If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.When VSA activates, you may notice

that the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some unusual noise from themodulator. You will also see the VSAactivation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

81

Driving

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

341

06/12/06 11:14:38 32SMR600_344

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Driving with varying tyre or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tyres,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tyres (seepage ).

If you install winter tyres, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This switch is next to the driver’sside vent. Press it to turn the VSAsystem on and off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

414

Driving

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tyre Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

342

06/12/06 11:14:46 32SMR600_345

－

CONTINUED

Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-quire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your vehicle well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise control (onsome types) should not be used inthese conditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your vehicle longerto react, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few kilometers(miles) of driving while you adjust tothe change in driving conditions.This is especially true in snow. Aperson can forget some snow-drivingtechniques during the summermonths. Practice is needed to relearnthose skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Driving

Driving Technique

Driving in Bad Weather

343

06/12/06 11:14:52 32SMR600_346

－－Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windscreen wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-screen washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windscreenwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windscreen or leave partsunwiped. Use the demister and airconditioning (on some types) to keepthe windows from fogging up on theinside (see pages and ).

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Check your tyresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘aquaplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tyres on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

202 208

Driving in Bad Weather

Visibility Traction

Driving344

CAUTION: Do not drive on the roadwhere water is deep. Driving throughdeep water will cause damage to theengine and electrical equipment andthe vehicle will break down.

06/12/06 11:15:00 32SMR600_347

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir luggage. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

The total weight of the trailer andtowbar (with/without brakes) plusits luggage must not exceed themaximum towing weight. See page

.

The trailer nose load should neverexceed 75 kg (165 lbs). This is theamount of weight the trailer putson the towbar when it is fully-loaded. As a rule of thumb fortrailer weights of less than 750 kg(1,653 lbs), the trailer nose loadshould be 10 percent of the totaltrailer package.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer.

488

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Driving

Towing a Trailer

On Type-R model

345

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading yourvehicle and trailer can causea crash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

06/12/06 11:15:07 32SMR600_348

The maximum permissible weightmust not exceed the specified limitas shown on page .

The maximum permissible weightis total weight of the vehicle,driver, passengers, luggage andtowbar.

Please consider that theinstallation of optionals (and trailernose load when towing a trailer)will reduce the loading capacity.

Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtrailer nose load gauge, check thetotal weight, the weight at each axleand the trailer nose load the firsttime you set up a towing combination(a fully-loaded vehicle and trailer),then recheck the loads whenever theconditions change.

For example, if the trailer and itsload weigh 225 kg (500 lbs), thetrailer nose load should be 22.5 kg(50 lbs). Adjust trailer’s luggage tochange the trailer nose load. Startby putting approximately60 percent of the luggage towardthe front and 40 percent towardthe rear. With a trailer package ofmore than 750 kg (1,653 lbs), youmay need to adjust the luggageweight toward the rear. Neverload the trailer so the back isheavier than the front. This takesweight off your vehicle’s rear axleand reduces traction.

488

Checking Loads

Driving

Towing a Trailer

346

06/12/06 11:15:14 32SMR600_349

CONTINUED

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets the country’s regulationswhere you are driving.

Refer to page for the towbarmounting points.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and towbar,and that they cross under the trailernose and can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

If you are thinking of getting a trailerthat has brakes, be sure they areelectronically actuated. Do notattempt to tap into your vehicle’shydraulic system. No matter howsuccessful it may seem, any attemptto attach trailer brakes to yourvehicle’s hydraulic system will lowerbraking effectiveness and create apotential hazard.

Any towbar used on your vehiclemust be properly bolted to theunderbody.

487

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Towbars

Safety Chains

Trailer Brakes

347

06/12/06 11:15:24 32SMR600_350

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with the country’sregulations where you are driving.Check the requirements for theareas where you plan to tow, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

You can get an optional trailerlighting connector for your vehiclefrom your dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem.

Always consult your dealer beforeconnecting the trailer lights to yourvehicle’s lighting system.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tyres, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The towbar, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

There may be laws requiring specialoutside mirrors when towing a trailer.Check the local laws in the country.Even if there are no legalrequirements, you should installspecial mirrors if you cannot clearlysee behind you, or if the trailercreates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Trailer Lights

Additional Trailer Equipment

Pre-Tow Checklist

348

06/12/06 11:15:34 32SMR600_351

CONTINUED

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmanoeuvre before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tyres and spare (ifequipped) are properly inflated,and the trailer tyres and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

Be sure to check regulationsconcerning the maximum speed ordriving restrictions for vehiclestowing trailers. If you are drivingacross several countries, checkeach country’s requirementsbefore leaving home, becauseregulations may vary.

Operating speed when towing atrailer is restricted to 100 km/h(62 mph).

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.

Do not exceed the limited speedwhen towing a trailer. At higherspeeds, the trailer may sway oraffect vehicle handling (see ‘‘

’’ in the next page foradditional gear information).

If you have an i-SHIFT (automatedmanual transmission), use theautomatic mode when towing atrailer. When you start or accelerateaway from a stop, the transmissionstarts in the first gear and iscontrolled for smooth operation.Selecting the gear is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting andbetter fuel economy according to thevehicle load and the trailer’s weight.

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Driving Safely With a Trailer Towing Speeds and Gears

Drivingon Hills

349

06/12/06 11:15:43 32SMR600_352

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Driving on an uphill road of morethan 12% slope is not recommendedfor your vehicle.

We recommend that you tow atrailer on the roads recommended bythe trailer association.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and always apply enginebraking by shifting down. Whengoing down a steep hill, use the 1stgear to provide greater enginebraking.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the transmissionand the clutch system to overheat.

Make sure to set the parking brakewhen starting off on an incline.


Driving

Towing a Trailer

Handling Crosswinds and BuffetingMaking Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

350

06/12/06 11:15:53 32SMR600_353

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

You should keep the engine idlingfor about 2 minutes before turningoff the ignition switch. (Idling theengine is prohibited in somecountries. Always follow the legalrequirements of the countries inwhich you will drive.)

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in 1st or reverse. Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tyres.

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Backing Up On Diesel models onlyParking

351

06/12/06 11:15:59 32SMR600_354

352

06/12/06 11:16:01 32SMR600_355

Regularly maintaining your vehicle isthe best way to protect your invest-ment. You will be rewarded withsafer, more economical, trouble-freedriving. This section lists items thatneed to be checked regularly andexplains how to check them. It alsodetails some simple maintenancetasks you can do yourself. Themaintenance schedules show youwhen these things need to be done.

......................Maintenance Safety . 354.................Maintenance Schedule . 355

....................Maintenance Record . 363..............................Fluid Locations . 364

Adding Engine Oil.........................(Petrol models) . 368

Adding Engine Oil.........................(Diesel models) . 370

Engine Coolant.........................(Petrol models) . 372

Engine Coolant.........................(Diesel models) . 374

...................Windscreen Washers . 376........Manual Transmission Fluid . 377

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 378Air Cleaner Element

.........................(Petrol models) . 380Air Cleaner Element

.........................(Diesel models) . 383......................................Fuel Filter . 384

.............................................Lights . 385..............Air Conditioning System . 405

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 406.................................Wiper Blades . 408

..............................................Tyres . 411...................Checking the Battery . 418

.............................Vehicle Storage . 420

Maintenance

Maintenance

353

06/12/06 11:16:05 32SMR600_356

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedtechnician.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not fuel.

Maintenance

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

354

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which youcan be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual/Service Book.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructionsand precautions can causeyou to be seriously hurt orkilled.

Always follow theprocedures and precautionsin this owner’s manual.

06/12/06 11:16:15 32SMR600_357

－

The required maintenance schedulespecifies all maintenance required tokeep your vehicle in peak operatingcondition. Maintenance work shouldbe performed in accordance with thestandards and specifications ofHonda by properly trained andequipped technicians. Yourauthorized dealer meets all of theserequirements.

The maintenance schedule in thisowner’s manual should be appliedexcept for EU countries, Australia,and New Zealand (see pages to

).

In EU countries, follow themaintenance schedule in the ServiceBook that came with your vehicle.

There are two types of maintenanceschedule in this owner’s manual. Oneis for petrol models (see pages to

), and the other is for dieselmodels (see pages ).

Always use the recommendedpetrol only (see page ).

Always use the recommendeddiesel fuel only (see page ).

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids or theirequivalent whenever you havemaintenance done. These are thesame high-quality items that wentinto your vehicle when it was new, soyou can be sure they fit and performflawlessly.


Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several kilometres(miles).

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother vehicle parts.

The maintenance schedule assumesyou will use your vehicle as normaltransportation for passengers andtheir possessions. You should alsofollow these recommendations:

In Australia, follow the maintenanceschedule in the owner’s warrantyand service manual that came withyour vehicle.In New Zealand, follow themaintenance schedule in the servicemaintenance and warranty book thatcame with your vehicle.

357359

357359

360 362

298

299

On Petrol models

On Diesel models

On Diesel models

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance 355

06/12/06 11:16:28 32SMR600_358

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the use or specified intervals.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level

Check the radiator reserve tankevery time you fill the fuel tank.See page .

Check the expansion tank everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Windscreen washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Windscreen wipers Check thewiper condition monthly. If thewipers do not wipe the windscreensecurely, check them for wear,cracks, and other damage.

Brakes and clutch Check thefluid level monthly. See page .

Brake pedal Check the brakepedal for smooth operation.

Parking brake Check theparking brake lever for smoothoperation.

Tyres Check the tyre pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Battery Check its condition andthe terminals for corrosionmonthly. See page .

Air conditioning system (on sometypes) Check its operationweekly. See page .

Windscreen demister Operatethe heater and air conditioningand check the demister ventsmonthly.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, position lights, tail-lights, high-mount brake light, andlicence plate lights monthly. Seepage .

Doors Check the tailgate andboth doors for smooth opening/closing and secure locking.

Horn Check the horn operation.

302

304

305

376

378

411

418

405

385

On Petrol models

On Diesel models

Maintenance Schedule

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance356

06/12/06 11:16:43 32SMR600_359

－

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

This maintenance scheduleoutlines the minimum requiredmaintenance that you shouldperform to ensure the trouble-free operation of your vehicle.Due to regional and climaticdifferences, some additionalservicing may be required.Please consult your warrantybooklet for a more detaileddescription.

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule for Petrol Models (Except EU, Australia and New Zealand)

357

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E

Service at the indicated distanceor time whichever comes first.

km x 1,000miles x 1,000months

Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)

Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles)Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)

6037.536

14087.584

180112.5108

Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months


Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year

2012.512

4025.024

8050.048

10062.560

12075.072

160100.0

96

200125.0120

Only severe schedule is required in some countries: refer to the local warranty booklet that came with your vehicle.Refer to page for replacement information under severe conditions.Refer to page for replacement information under severe driving conditions.

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil filter

Clean air cleaner element (Dry type only)Replace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace fuel filterReplace spark plugsInspect drive beltInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant At 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years, thereafter

every 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years

Iridium type

NormalSevereNormalSevere

1 :2 :3 :

359384

1

1

3

2

2

06/12/06 11:17:00 32SMR600_360

－

＊

＊

Maintenance


358

Visually inspect the following items:

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E



Refer to page for replacement information under severe conditions.

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)Check expiry date for TRK bottle (if equipped)Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition atleast once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections


Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)

2012.512

4025.024

6037.536


8050.048

10062.560

12075.072

14087.584

160100.0

96

180112.5108

200125.0120

Every 3 years (independent of distance)

1:

M/T

i-SHIFT


359

1

06/12/06 11:17:14 32SMR600_361

Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperatures,driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.Driving in extremely hot [over 35°C (95°F)] conditions.

If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severeconditions, the following items must be serviced according to themaintenance schedule indicated as Severe.

Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainousconditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Condition

A, B, C, D, E

B, D

Items

Engine oil and oil filter

Manual transmissionfluid (M/T, i-SHIFT)

A:

B:C:D:

E:

Maintenance

NOTE:

Severe driving conditions:


359

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E

06/12/06 11:17:22 32SMR600_362

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

This maintenance scheduleoutlines the minimum requiredmaintenance that you shouldperform to ensure the trouble-free operation of your vehicle.Due to regional and climaticdifferences, some additionalservicing may be required.Please consult your warrantybooklet for a more detaileddescription.

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule for Diesel Models (Except EU)

360

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E



Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 yearEvery 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months

12075.072

8050.048

160100.0

96

200125.0120

4025.024



2012.512

6037.536

10062.560

14087.584

180112.5108

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Replace air cleaner element (Wet type)

Replace fuel filterInspect drive beltReplace engine coolantReplace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakes


NormalSevere

Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles)Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)

1:

M/T

362

1

1

1

06/12/06 11:17:35 32SMR600_363

－

＊

CONTINUED

Maintenance


361

Visually inspect the following items:

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E



Replace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)Check expiry date for TRK bottle (if equipped)Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition atleast once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

2012.512

4025.024

6037.536

8050.048

10062.560

12075.072

14087.584

160100.0

96

180112.5108

200125.0120

Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)



Every 3 years (independent of distance)

1 : 362

06/12/06 11:17:48 32SMR600_364

If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severeconditions, the following items must be serviced according to themaintenance schedule indicated as Severe.

Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperatures,driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.Driving in extremely hot [over 35°C (95°F)] conditions.Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in mountainousconditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Condition

A, B, C, D, E

D, E

B, D

Items

Engine oil and oil filter

Air cleaner element

Manual transmissionfluid

A:

B:C:D:

E:

Maintenance


NOTE:

Severe driving conditions:

362

MA

IN

TE

NA

NC

ES

CH

ED

UL

E

06/12/06 11:17:56 32SMR600_365

Have your servicing dealer record all required maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

12,500 Mi.(or 12 Mo.)

25,000 Mi.(or 24 Mo.)

37,500 Mi.(or 36 Mo.)

50,000 Mi.(or 48 Mo.)

62,500 Mi.(or 60 Mo.)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

75,000 Mi.(or 72 Mo.)

87,500 Mi.(or 84 Mo.)

100,000 Mi.(or 96 Mo.)

112,500 Mi.(or 108 Mo.)

125,000 Mi.(or 120 Mo.)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

(Sign or Stamp)

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

Km (Mi.) or Month

Date

20,000 km

40,000 km

60,000 km

80,000 km

100,000 km

120,000 km

140,000 km

160,000 km

180,000 km

200,000 km

Maintenance Record (Except EU)

Maintenance 363

06/12/06 11:18:03 32SMR600_366

Fluid Locations (Petrol models with manual transmission)

Maintenance

1.8 engine model

364

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

RADIATOR CAP ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

CLUTCH FLUID(Light gray cap)


06/12/06 11:18:06 32SMR600_367

Maintenance

Fluid Locations (Petrol models with manual transmission)2.0 engine model (Type-R)

365


RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Black handle)



ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR


06/12/06 11:18:11 32SMR600_368

Fluid Locations (Petrol models with i-SHIFT)

Maintenance

1.8 engine model (i-shift)

366



RADIATOR CAP ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR



CLUTCH FLUID(Black cap)

06/12/06 11:18:14 32SMR600_369

Fluid Locations (Diesel models)

Maintenance

Diesel model

367


EXPANSIONTANK


ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

Right-hand drive model is shown.


06/12/06 11:18:18 32SMR600_370

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour inthe oil slowly and carefully so you donot spill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil. It is highlyrecommended that you use genuineHonda Motor Oil, ‘‘ACEA A1/B1,’’‘‘ACEA A3/B3,’’ or ‘‘ACEA A5/B5’’in your vehicle for as long as youown it.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Let the enginewarm up and turn off the engine, letit sit for approximately 3 minutes,then check the oil level on theengine oil dipstick. Do not fill abovethe upper mark; you could damagethe engine.

Recommended Engine OilEuropean models

Adding Engine Oil (Petrol models)

Maintenance368

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Type-RExcept Type-R

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

06/12/06 11:18:25 32SMR600_371

＊

You can select the proper SAE/ACEA viscosity oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart:

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade deter-gent oil. It is highly recommendedthat you use genuine Honda MotorOil in your vehicle for as long as youown it.

You can select the proper SAEviscosity oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart:

Always use an API service SL orhigher grade fuel-efficient oil. Thisoil is formulated to help your engineuse less fuel.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

This oil is formulated to help yourengine use less fuel.

: Except Type-R

CONTINUED


Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil (Petrol models)

Maintenance 369

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

06/12/06 11:18:33 32SMR600_372

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour inthe oil slowly and carefully so you donot spill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Let the enginewarm up and turn off the engine, letit sit for approximately 3 minutes,then check the oil level on theengine oil dipstick. Do not fill abovethe upper mark; you could damagethe engine.

Always use a synthetic motor oil thatmeets the ACEA specifications, andis the proper weight as shown in thefollowing chart. When usingsynthetic oil, you must follow the oiland filter change intervals given inthe maintenance schedule.

You can select the proper ACEA/SAE viscosity oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart:

NOTE: 0W-30 oil is formulated toimprove fuel economy.

It is highly recommended that youuse genuine Honda Motor Oil or0W-30 synthetic motor oil meetingthe minimum specification: ‘‘ACEAA1/B1,’’ ‘‘ACEA A3/B3,’’ or ‘‘ACEAA5/B5.’’

Recommended Engine Oil

On Vehicles without DPF

Adding Engine Oil (Diesel models)

Maintenance370

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Ambient Temperature

06/12/06 11:18:42 32SMR600_373

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

It is highly recommended that youuse genuine Honda Motor Oil or0W-30 synthetic motor oil meetingthe minimum specification: ‘‘ACEAC2’’ or ‘‘ACEA C3.’’You can select the proper ACEA/SAE viscosity oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart:

NOTE: 0W-30 oil is formulated toimprove fuel economy.

Engine Oil AdditivesOn Vehicles with DPF only

Adding Engine Oil (Diesel models)

Maintenance 371

Ambient Temperature

06/12/06 11:18:48 32SMR600_374

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

The cooling system contains manyaluminium components that cancorrode if an improper antifreeze isused. Some antifreeze, even thoughlabelled as safe for aluminium parts,may not provide adequate protection.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Always use genuine Honda AllSeason Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.This coolant is pre-mixed with 50percent antifreeze and 50 percentwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant (Petrol models)

Maintenance372

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to sprayout, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

RESERVE TANK

Petrol models

06/12/06 11:18:55 32SMR600_375

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capanticlockwise, without pressingdown.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turninganticlockwise.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spills immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

4.

5.

6.1.

2.

3.

Engine Coolant (Petrol models)

Maintenance 373

RESERVE TANKRADIATOR CAP

Petrol models

06/12/06 11:19:04 32SMR600_376

If the coolant level in the expansiontank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use genuine Honda AllSeason Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.This coolant is pre-mixed with 50percent antifreeze and 50 percentwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

The cooling system contains manyaluminium components that cancorrode if an improper antifreeze isused. Some antifreeze, even thoughlabelled as safe for aluminium parts,may not provide adequate protection.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant (Diesel models)

Maintenance374

Removing the expansiontank cap while the engine ishot can cause the coolant tospray out, seriously scaldingyou.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the expansion tankcap.

EXPANSIONTANK

MIN LINE

MAX LINE

06/12/06 11:19:11 32SMR600_377

The coolant level should be up tothe MAX line. Add coolant if it islow.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spills immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the expansion tank cap backon, and tighten it fully.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Remove the expansion tank cap bypushing down and turninganticlockwise.


Loosen the expansion tank cap byturning it 1/8 turn anticlockwise.This will relieve any remainingpressure in the cooling system.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

Engine Coolant (Diesel models)

Maintenance 375

MAX LINE

CAP

06/12/06 11:19:19 32SMR600_378

Check the fluid level in thewindscreen washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level asfollows:

Unfasten the reservoir cap.

Pull up the cap until the tube isfully exposed.

Check the fluid trace on the tube.If the fluid level is low, fill thereservoir with windscreen washerfluid.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindscreen washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windscreen wiperblades with windscreen washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

Do not use engine antifreeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindscreen washer reservoir.Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’spaint, while a vinegar/water solutioncan damage the windscreen washerpump. Use only commercially-available windscreen washer fluid.

1.

2.

3.

Windscreen Washers

Maintenance376

Petrol models Diesel models

06/12/06 11:19:28 32SMR600_379

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Always use genuine Honda MTF-3(Manual Transmission Fluid-3). If itis not available, you may use an APIservice SJ or higher grade motor oilwith a viscosity of SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 as a temporary replacement.However, motor oil does not containthe proper additives, and continueduse can cause stiffer shifting.Replace as soon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Always use genuine Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF). If it isnot available, you may use an APIservice SJ or higher grade motor oilwith a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or10W-40 as a temporary replacement.However, motor oil does not containthe proper additives, and continueduse can cause stiffer shifting.Replace as soon as it is convenient.

On vehicles with i-SHIFTOn vehicles with manualtransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 377

06/12/06 11:19:34 32SMR600_380

The brake fluid reservoir consists ofthe two parts: primary and secondaryreservoirs. The secondary reservoiris behind the primary reservoir.MAX mark is on the primaryreservoir, and MIN is on thesecondary.

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

Brake fluid reservoirClutch fluid reservoir

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘BRAKEFLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-information display when the brakefluid level is low.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe recommendation in themaintenance schedule.

Always use genuine Honda BrakeFluid or an equivalent from a sealedcontainer that is marked DOT3 orDOT4 only. Brake fluid markedDOT5 is not compatible with yourvehicle’s braking system.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Brake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance378

MIN MAX

Diesel modelsPetrol models

MINMAXManual transmission model is shown.

06/12/06 11:19:44 32SMR600_381

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Clutch System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance 379

MAX

MIN

Diesel models

MAX

MIN

Petrol models with manualtransmission

Petrol models with i-Shifttransmission

MAX

MIN

06/12/06 11:19:51 32SMR600_382

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

The air cleaner element should alsobe cleaned according to themaintenance schedule.

Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your dealer to do thisservice.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

Unsnap the four hold-down clipsand remove the air cleanerhousing cover.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing in the enginecompartment.

1.

On vehicles with dry type air cleanerelement

Cleaning

Replacement(Petrol models except Type-R)

Air Cleaner Element (Petrol models)

Maintenance380

CLIPS

Except Type-R

06/12/06 11:20:01 32SMR600_383

To replace it:

Unsnap the three holding-clips andpull up the front of the air cleanerhousing cover.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and snap the four hold-down clips back into place.

Connect the air intake tube to theair cleaner housing cover.

Make sure to free two detents ofthe air cleaner housing cover fromtheir holders.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.1.

CONTINUED


Maintenance

Replacement(Type-R model)

381

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Except Type-R Except Type-R Type-R CLIP DETENT

HOLDER

06/12/06 11:20:12 32SMR600_384




Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and snap the three holding-clips securely.

Make sure all detents are securedin their holders.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Maintenance


382

Type-R AIR CLEANER ELEMENT Type-R

06/12/06 11:20:20 32SMR600_385


Unsnap the three holding-clips andpull up the front of the air cleanerhousing cover.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and snap the three holding-clips securely.



1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Replacement(Diesel models)

Air Cleaner Element (Diesel models)

Maintenance 383

CLIPS

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

06/12/06 11:20:30 32SMR600_386

The fuel filter should be replacedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in the mainte-nance schedule.

Have a qualified technician changethe fuel filter. Since the fuel systemis under pressure, fuel can spray outand create a hazard if all fuel lineconnections are not handledcorrectly.

You will see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ orthe symbol with a ‘‘WATER INFUEL FILTER’’ message on themulti-information display when waterstays in the fuel system. Contactyour dealer as soon as possible (seepage ).

The fuel filter should be drained ofwater according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

After the vehicle has been stored foran extended period, the engine maynot start. If water stays in the fuelsystem, you will see the symbol onthe multi-information display whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. This may also becaused by air in the fuel system. Inthis case, follow the procedure for

(seepage ).

It is recommended to replace thefuel filter every 40,000 km (25,000miles), or 2 years (Except EU,Australia and New Zealand) if thefuel is suspected to be contaminated.In a high dust environment, the filtermay become clogged sooner.

109

421

Draining Water(Diesel models only)

Priming the Fuel SystemOn European models

Fuel Filter

Maintenance384

06/12/06 11:20:39 32SMR600_387

＊＊

＊

＊

Check the operation of your vehicle’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can make thecondition of your vehicle unsafereducing your vehicle’s visibility andthe ability to signal your intentions toother drivers.

Replacement of these bulbs should be done by your dealer.1:2:

If equipped

Lights

Maintenance 385

POSITIONLIGHT

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT

FRONT TURNSIGNAL LIGHT

SIDE TURNSIGNAL LIGHT

FRONT FOG LIGHT

LOW BEAMHEADLIGHT

2

1

06/12/06 11:20:44 32SMR600_388

＊＊

＊＊＊

＊＊＊＊

Check the following:

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

Headlights (low and high beam)Position lights

Brake lightsTurn signals

Back-up lightsHazard light functionLicence plate lightsHigh-mount brake light

Rear fog light

Side turn signals

Tail-lights

Front fog lights (for some models)

Rear fog light is installed on the driver’s side only.Replacement of these bulbs should be done by your dealer.

1:2:3:4:

Type-R modelExcept Type-R

492

Lights

Maintenance386

STOP/TAIL-LIGHT REAR FOG LIGHT

Left-hand drive type is shown.

TURNSIGNAL STOP/

TAIL-LIGHTBACK-UPLIGHT LICENCE PLATE

LIGHTS

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHTREAR FOG LIGHT

1, 4

21, 3

06/12/06 11:20:56 32SMR600_389

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in theluggage area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or other qualified technician.

The vertical angle of the headlightscan be adjusted. For moreinformation, see page .

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause thebulb to overheat and shatter.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

Your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic headlight adjustingsystem that adjusts the vertical angleof the headlights (low beam)automatically. Refer to page formore information.

146

146

On vehicles with high voltage dischargetype low beam headlights

Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlights with High VoltageDischarge Tubes(For some types)

Headlight Aiming

(For some types)

Lights

Maintenance 387

06/12/06 11:21:06 32SMR600_390

Reinstall the cover over the backof the headlight assembly and turnit clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulb.

Remove the cover on the back ofthe headlight assembly by turningit anticlockwise.

Open the bonnet.

3.

4.2.

1.

5.

6.

7.

8.

High Beam Headlights(Petrol models)

Lights

Maintenance388

CONNECTOR

BULB

06/12/06 11:21:15 32SMR600_391

↑

CONTINUED

To change a bulb on the left side,remove the cable from the clip andundo the two fasteners from thesecondary air intake cover bypulling the centre of each fastener.Remove the cover, then removethe upper part of the secondary airduct.

Open the bonnet. Remove the cover on the back ofthe headlight assembly by turningit anticlockwise.

To change a bulb on the left side,remove the upper part of thesecondary air duct.

1. 2.(Type-R)

Low Beam Headlights(Petrol models)

Lights

Maintenance 389

Front

SECONDARY AIR DUCT

COVER Type-R

COVERSECONDARY AIR DUCT

06/12/06 11:21:25 32SMR600_392

Open the bonnet.

To change a bulb on the left side,remove the nut on the battery stay,then push the battery toward thewindscreen to obtain enoughworking space.



Reinstall the cover over the backof the headlight assembly and turnit clockwise to lock in place. Makesure it is right side up; it is marked‘‘TOP.’’


Reinstall the secondary air intakeduct securely, then put the coverback in place. Reinstall the twofasteners and secure them bypushing on the heads until theylock, and put the cable back inplace.



5.

6.

7.

8.1.

9.

3.

4.

Lights

Maintenance

High Beam Headlights(Diesel models)

390

BULB

CONNECTOR

06/12/06 11:21:36 32SMR600_393

CONTINUED


Remove the coolant tubes fromthe two clips and the over flowtube from the expansion tank,then remove the expansion tankfrom its holder by pushing the taband pulling the tank straight up.

To change a bulb on the right side,remove the upper part of thewasher fluid reservoir by pulling itstraight out.


2.

Lights

Maintenance 391

EXPANSIONTANK COVER

OVERFLOWTUBE

WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR CAP

COOLANT TUBES

06/12/06 11:21:44 32SMR600_394


Put the battery back to its originalposition, reinstall the nut on thestay and tighten it securely.

Reinstall the expansion tank on itsholder, then put the coolant tubesback in place. Reinstall the overflow tube to the expansion tanksecurely. Put the upper part of thewasher fluid reservoir back inplace.



Reinstall the cover over the backof the headlight assembly and turnit clockwise to lock it in place.



5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

4.

On the left side

On the right side

Lights

Maintenance392

BULB

CONNECTOR

06/12/06 11:21:52 32SMR600_395

↑

CONTINUED




Open the bonnet.

To change a bulb on the left side,remove the nut on the battery stay,then push the battery toward thewindscreen to obtain enoughworking space.

4.

3.2.1.

Lights

Maintenance

Low Beam Headlights(Diesel models)

393

COVER

Front

BULB

CONNECTOR

06/12/06 11:22:03 32SMR600_396


A front position light bulb is locatedunderneath the high beam headlightbulb under the cover.

Open the bonnet.

To change a left side bulb, obtainworking space by moving thebattery toward the windscreen(see page ).






2.

1.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

390

On Diesel models

On the left side

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Position LightBulb

394

COVER

06/12/06 11:22:12 32SMR600_397

CONTINUED

To change the left side bulb, startthe engine, turn the steeringwheel all the way to the right, andturn off the engine. To change theright side bulb, turn the steeringwheel to the left.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Insert the new bulb into theheadlight assembly. Make sure itis on all the way.


Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.


Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn anticlockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

1.

2.

5.

6.

7.

8.3.

4.

On the left side

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Turn SignalLight Bulb

395

HOLDING CLIPS

BULB

SOCKET

06/12/06 11:22:23 32SMR600_398

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover. Remove itby carefully prying on the edgewith a flat-tipped screwdriver.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing it in and turning thebulb anticlockwise until it unlocks.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


Put the inner fender in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach clip in place by pushing onthe centre.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn anticlockwise.

1.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

4.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs(In Fenders)

396

COVER

SOCKET

BULB

06/12/06 11:22:32 32SMR600_399

Remove the socket for that bulbby turning it one-quarter turnanticlockwise.


Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Reinstall the light assembly intoplace, then tighten the mountingbolts securely.

Align the tabs on the cover withthe holes in the body. Slide thecover on to the rear pillar andreinstall it security.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/tail-light orturn signal light.

Use a wrench to remove the twomounting bolts.

Pull the light assembly out of therear pillar.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.4.

10.

2.

3.

Lights

Maintenance 397

BOLTS

06/12/06 11:22:42 32SMR600_400

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover on the backof the tailgate. Remove it bycarefully prying on the edge with aflat-tipped screwdriver.

Determine which of the four orthree bulbs is burned out: stop/tail-light, back-up light, licenceplate light or rear fog light (on thedriver’s side only).

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn anticlockwise.

1. 2.

3.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Tailgate)

398

Except Type-R

Type-R

COVER

06/12/06 11:22:51 32SMR600_401

CONTINUED

Remove the bolt with a wrench.

Pull the fog light assembly fromthe bumper carefully, whilepushing the light assemblyoutward.

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Halogen light bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause thebulb to overheat and shatter.


Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Reinstall the cover into tailgate.

1.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb(For some types)

399

BOLT

06/12/06 11:23:00 32SMR600_402

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turnanticlockwise.

Turn on the front fog lights to testthe new bulb.

Align the tab on the light assemblyto the bumper, and reinstall thefog light assembly, then tightenthe screw securely.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

4.

Lights

Maintenance400

CONNECTOR

BULB

06/12/06 11:23:08 32SMR600_403

CONTINUED

The ceiling lights and vanity mirrorlights come apart the same way, butthey do not use the same type ofbulbs.

Remove the front housing on thefront ceiling light by carefullyprying on the edge of it with afingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver.

Front ceiling light:Pry on the edge of the front housing.

Rear ceiling light:Pry on the side edge of the lens inthe middle.

Vanity mirror light:Pry on the upper edge of the lens.

1.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLights

401

FRONT CEILING LIGHT

BULBS

06/12/06 11:23:17 32SMR600_404

Push the new bulb into the holder.Snap the lens or the housing backin place.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its holder.

Put a cloth on the front edge ofthe light assembly. Remove thelight assembly by using a smallflat-tipped screwdriver to prycarefully on the front edge of theassembly.

Open the tailgate.3.

2.

1.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the Luggage Area LightBulb

402

REAR CEILING LIGHT

BULB

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTBULB

06/12/06 11:23:25 32SMR600_405

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the light assembly by pullingit out.

Remove the plastic cover bypivoting it upward.

Pull the bulb straight out of theholder. Push the new bulb straightinto the holder until it bottoms.

Put the cover back in place andinstall the electrical connectorsecurely.

Put the light assembly back intothe hole, rear side first. Push onthe front side until it snaps intoplace.

2. 3.

4.

5.

6.

Lights

Maintenance 403

CONNECTOR

PLASTIC COVER

BULB

06/12/06 11:23:33 32SMR600_406

Open the glove box. Place a clothand pry the plastic lens carefullywith a small flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Remove the light assembly bypulling it down.

Pull the bulb straight out of itsholder. Install the new bulbstraight into the holder until itbottoms.

Turn on the position lights tomake sure the new bulb isworking.

Put the light assembly back inplace, then close the glove box.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Glove Box Light Bulb

404

BULB CONNECTOR

06/12/06 11:23:40 32SMR600_407

Your vehicle’s air conditioning is asealed system. Any majormaintenance, such as recharging,should be done by a qualifiedtechnician. You can do a couple ofthings to make sure the airconditioning works efficiently.

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

The condenser and radiator finsbend easily. Only use a low-pressurespray or soft-bristle brush to cleanthem.

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least 10minutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a).

Whenever you have the airconditioning system serviced, makesure the service facility uses arefrigerant recycling system. Thissystem captures the refrigerant forreuse. Releasing refrigerant into theatmosphere can damage theenvironment.

Air Conditioning System (For some types)

Maintenance 405

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER

06/12/06 11:23:47 32SMR600_408

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the climate controlsystem.

The dust and pollen filter is underthe dashboard on the passenger’sside of the front of the centreconsole.To replace it:

To access the filter, open thepassenger’s door.

Remove the under cover from thelower part of the dashboardcarefully.

This filter should be replaced duringscheduled maintenance. On EU,Australian, and New Zealand models,refer to the maintenance schedule inthe separate service informationbooklet that came with your vehicle.On other models, see themaintenance schedules in thisowner’s manual.

The dust and pollen filter should bereplaced at short intervals if youdrive primarily in urban areas thathave high concentrations of soot inthe air from industry and diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it moreoften if airflow from the climatecontrol system becomes less thanusual.

1.

2.

Replacement

Dust and Pollen Filter (For some types)

Maintenance406

UNDER COVERCLIPS

06/12/06 11:23:55 32SMR600_409

Install a new filter in the housing.Make sure the arrows of the ‘‘AirFlow’’ marks on the filter point tothe airflow direction (inside thevehicle).

Place the hinges to the housing(the lower side first), then reinstallthe cover.

If you are not sure how to replacethe dust and pollen filter, have itreplaced by your dealer.

Put the under cover back in placeand make sure the four clips arelatched securely.

Put your fingers in both side slitson the housing, grasp the filter,then pull it out.

To remove the cover, pull ittoward you with the tab whiletaking it out of its hinges (theupper side first).

5.

6.

3. 4.

Dust and Pollen Filter (For some types)

Maintenance 407

DUST AND POLLEN FILTER

COVER

TAB

06/12/06 11:24:03 32SMR600_410

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

Remove the cap on the wiperblade assembly by squeezing thelock tabs and sliding it outwardalong the holder.

Do not open the bonnet when thewiper arms are raised, or you willdamage the bonnet and the wiperarms.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindscreen. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

1.

2.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance408

WIPER ARMS

TAB

06/12/06 11:24:10 32SMR600_411

Remove the blade from the bladeassembly:

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releases fromthe wiper arm.

Carefully pull out the bladeassembly to prevent it from hittingthe windscreen.

If you cannot remove the cap,release the lock with a small flat-tipped screwdriver. Put a cloth onthe notch, insert a screwdriver andpush it slightly toward the top of thewiper blade, then slide the capoutward. Pull back the end of the blade

assembly on the ‘‘LOCK’’ side ofthe blade. Then grab the end ofthe blade, and slide it out.

Find the side of the bladelabeled ‘‘LOCK.’’ This is the sideyou pull out.

4.3.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 409

WIPER BLADE

BLADE ASSEMBLY

TAB

NOTCH

COVER

06/12/06 11:24:20 32SMR600_412

Do not pull up the end of theholder forcibly and bend theholder excessively while removingthe blade. This could damage theholder.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windscreen, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled and that its edge is notbunched up.

Install the new blade onto theblade assembly:

Pull back either end of the bladeassembly.

Place the side of the blade notlabeled ‘‘LOCK’’ on the end ofthe blade assembly, and slidethe blade onto the assemblyuntil it is fully installed.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Reinstall the cap on the wiper armalong to the slit on the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

6.

7.

8.

9.

5.

10.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance410

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

06/12/06 11:24:29 32SMR600_413

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtyres must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tyres and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tyres properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tyres wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tyres can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tyres every day. If youthink a tyre might be low, check itimmediately with a tyre gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tyre at least once amonth. Even tyres that are in goodcondition may lose 10 to 20 kPa (0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm , 1 to 2 psi) per month.

Remember to check the spare tyre atthe same time.

Check the air pressure when thetyres are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1.6km (1 mile). Add or release air, ifneeded, to match the recommendedcold tyre pressures on a label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

If you check air pressures when thetyres are hot [driven for severalkilometres (miles)], you will seereadings 30 to 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm , 4 to 6 psi) higher than thecold readings. This is normal. Do notlet air out to match therecommended cold air pressure. Thetyre will be underinflated.

CONTINUED

Inflation Guidelines

Tyres

Maintenance 411

Using tyres that areexcessively worn orimproperly inflated can causea crash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingtyre inflation andmaintenance.

06/12/06 11:24:38 32SMR600_414

You should get your own tyrepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tyre pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tyreproblem and not due to a variationbetween gauges.

While tubeless tyres have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tyre starts losingpressure.

For convenience, the recommendedcold air pressures and tyre sizes areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tyres fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tyre. Replace the tyre ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tyre. Replace the tyre if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.Your tyres have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread lefton the tyre.

A tyre this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tyre if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Tyre Inspection

Tyres

Maintenance412

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

06/12/06 11:24:47 32SMR600_415

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tyre wear. If you find a tyreis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tyres ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tyre should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tyresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tyre life. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminium wheels.Use only genuine Honda wheelweights for balancing.

To help increase tyre life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tyres every 10,000 km (6,250miles). Move the tyres to thepositions shown in the diagram eachtime they are rotated. If youpurchase directional tyres, rotateonly front-to-back.

Replace your tyres with radial tyresof the same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tyrepressure rating (as shown on thetyre’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tyres onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tyres of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS to work inconsistently.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtyres, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tyre sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system towork.For vehicles equipped with aluminium

wheels:

CONTINUED

Tyre Maintenance Tyre Rotation Replacing Tyres and Wheels

Tyres

Maintenance 413

Front

(For directionaltyres and wheels)

(For non-directionaltyres and wheels)

06/12/06 11:24:57 32SMR600_416

It is best to replace all four tyres atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttyres or two rear tyres as a pair.Replacing just one tyre can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.Consult your dealer before replacingtyres.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Wheels:1.8 engine models

Diesel engine models

2.0 engine models (Type-R)

Wheels and Tyres

Tyres

Maintenance414

Installing improper tyres onyour vehicle can affecthandling and stability. Thiscan cause a crash in whichyou can be seriously hurt orkilled.

Always use the size and typeof tyres recommended in thetyre information label onyour vehicle.

16 x 6 1/2J17 x 7J

17 x 7J16 x 6 1/2J15 x 6JJ

18 x 7 1/2J

06/12/06 11:25:05 32SMR600_417

＋＋

Install the winter tyres according tothe remarks in the registration paper.According to the EEC Directive fortyres, when winter tyres are used, itis necessary to affix a sticker withthe allowable max. speed of thewinter tyres clearly in the field ofview of the driver, if the designedmax. speed of vehicle is higher thanthe allowed max. speed of wintertyre. A sticker is obtainable fromyour tyre dealer. If any questionsarise, please discuss these with oneof our dealers.

Because of the limited winterqualification of summer tyres forwinter use we recommend the use ofwinter tyres (M S tyres) on snowyand icy roads. If M S tyres areinstalled, all four wheels should beequipped to insure safe driving. Useonly tyres of the same brand withthe same profile. Pay attention to thetyre size, load capacity and speedclass when buying.

The sizes of wheels and tyresinstalled on your vehicle varydepending on models.

See the tyre information label on thedriver’s doorjamb or ask your dealerfor information on the proper size ofthe tyres on your vehicle.

Tyres:1.8 engine models

2.0 engine models (Type-R)

Diesel engine models

Winter Tyres

Tyres

Maintenance 415

205/55R16 91V225/45R17 91Y225/45ZR17 91Y

195/65R15 91V205/55R16 91V225/45R17 91Y

225/40R18 88Y

06/12/06 11:25:13 32SMR600_418

×

Use snow chains only in anemergency or when they are legallyrequired for driving through acertain area. Install the snow chainson the front wheels. Use greatercaution when driving with snowchains on snow or ice. They mayhave less-predictable handling thangood winter tyres without chains.Some snow chains may damage thevehicle’s tyres, wheels, suspensionand body. Choose only fine limbedchains which guarantee enough freespace between the tyre and the othervehicle parts in the wheelhouse. Payattention to the sectional assemblyview and other directions from thechain manufacturer. Consult yourdealer before purchasing any type ofchains for your vehicle.

When you have installed tyre chains,drive at less than 30 km/h (19 mph)on roads covered with snow or ice.To minimize tyre and chain wear,avoid driving on cleared roads withchains installed.

You cannot install any type of tyrechains on your vehicle. Replace theoriginal tyres with optional 205/55R16 tyres if you need to install tyrechains.

You cannot install any type of tyrechains on your vehicle. Replace theoriginal wheels with optional 16 61/2 JJ wheels (205/55R 16 tyre) ifyou need to install tyre chains.

On vehicles equipped with 225/45R17,195/65R15 size tyres

Except Type-R

Type-ROn vehicles equipped with 225/40R18size tyres

Tyre Chains

Tyres

Maintenance416

06/12/06 11:25:19 32SMR600_419

＊

＊

＊

＊

×

＊

＊

＊

Use only the specified chains or their equivalents for your tyres as listed.

On 225/45R17, 195/65R15 tyres, you cannot install any type of tyrechains. If you have to use tyre chains, replace the original tyres with theoptional 205/55R16 tyre.

Original tyre is mentioned on the tyre information label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Original Tyre Size Chain Type

On Type-R, only Type-R wheels 16 6 1/2 JJ (205/55R 16 tyre) can beused. If you are not sure, ask your dealer.

1:

2:

3:

1

For EU models

Tyres

Maintenance 417

195/65R15

205/55R16

225/45R17

225/40R18

Not Available

RUD-matic classic 48482 or equivalents

Not Available

Not Available

2

2

3

06/12/06 11:25:25 32SMR600_420

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolours.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance418

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Except Type-R Diesel modelsType-R

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

06/12/06 11:25:33 32SMR600_421

－

－

－

Flush with water from a cupor other container for at least 15minutes. (Water under pressure candamage the eye.) Call a physicianimmediately.

Remove contaminatedclothing. Flush the skin with largequantities of water. Call a physicianimmediately.

Drink water or milk.Call a physician immediately.

CONTINUED

Emergency Procedures

Eyes

Skin

Swallowing

Checking the Battery

Maintenance 419

The battery gives offexplosive hydrogen gasduring normal operation. Aspark or open flame cancause the battery to explodewith enough force to kill orseriously hurt you.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

Wear protective clothing anda face shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

The battery contains sulfuricacid (electrolyte) which ishighly corrosive andpoisonous.

Getting electrolyte in youreyes or on your skin cancause serious burns. Wearprotective clothing and eyeprotection when working onor near the battery.

Swallowing electrolyte cancause fatal poisoning ifimmediate action is nottaken.

KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OFCHILDREN

06/12/06 11:25:39 32SMR600_422

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetyres are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windscreen.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Fill the fuel tank.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to bothdoors and tailgate seals. Also,apply a vehicle body wax to thepainted surfaces that mate withthe door and tailgate seals.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, thespeedometer’s is reading is reset tothe mph or km/h (for some types)display (see page ).

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mustmove the shift lever to neutral andpress on the brake pedal to reset theneutral position after reconnectingthe battery. You press on the brakepedal for about 3 seconds until thegear position indicator shows N thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

85

On the right-hand drive types


Vehicle Storage

Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

Maintenance420

06/12/06 11:25:51 32SMR600_423

＊

＊

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

After you parked the vehicle foran extended period, water stays inthe fuel system and the engine willnot start. In this case, the fuelfilter may be needed to drain offwater (see onpage ).

If you store your vehicle for 1 year orlonger, have your dealer perform themaintenance inspections called for inthe 2 years/40,000 km (25,000 miles)maintenance schedule as soon asyou take it out of storage (see page

). The replacements called for inthe maintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time ordistance.

For EU countries, Australia, andNew Zealand, see the separateservice information booklet.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel, themalfunction indicator lamp will comeon, or the symbol ‘‘ ’’ willappear on the multi-informationdisplay, and the engine will notrestart after refueling the fuel tankwith the appropriate fuel (see pages

and ).

In this case, air may have enteredthe fuel system. The system requirespriming to start the engine. Primethe fuel system as follows:

Refuel the fuel tank (minimum 5litres).

Open the bonnet.

:

1.

2.

384

355

468 469

CONTINUED

On Diesel models only

Draining Water

Priming the Fuel System(Diesel models only)

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance 421

06/12/06 11:26:02 32SMR600_424

Loosen the two holding screws,then remove the cover.

Squeeze the fuel hand primer untilyou feel a strong resistance.


Start the engine (see page ). Ifthe engine does not start rightaway, do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 10seconds at a time. This willdamage the fuel pump and theengine starter.

If the engine fails to start, returnto step 4.

After the engine restarts, pressthe accelerator pedal slightly andhold it at approximately 1,500 rpmfor about 30 seconds. This willcomplete the air bleeding in thefuel system.

The engine runs normally, but themalfunction indicator lamp or thePGM-FI warning remains on.

Reinstall the cover in front of thefuel hand primer, then tighten theholding screws securely.

To turn off the indicator, restart andturn off the engine at least threetimes at intervals of approximately30 seconds.

If this procedure is performedduring normal driving, the indicatorwill be turned off and the PGM-FIwarning on the multi-informationdisplay will go out.

If you are not sure how to bleed theair, contact your dealer.

If the engine fails to restart afterpriming the fuel system, there is aproblem in the fuel system. Youshould have the vehicle inspected byyour dealer.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.320

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance422

FUEL HAND PRIMER

HOLDING SCREW

06/12/06 11:26:14 32SMR600_425

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour vehicle helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives youinformation on how to clean yourvehicle and preserve its appearance:the paint, brightwork, wheels andinterior. Also included are severalthings you can do to help preventcorrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 424.....................................Washing . 424

.......................................Waxing . 425...................Aluminium Wheels . 425

..........................Paint Touch-up . 426..................................Interior Care . 427...................................Carpeting . 427.................................Floor Mats . 427

.........................................Fabric . 428...........................................Vinyl . 428

.......................................Leather . 428....................................Windows . 428...................................Seat Belts . 429

..........................Air Fresheners . 429....................Corrosion Protection . 430

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 423

06/12/06 11:26:18 32SMR600_426

Frequent washing helps preserveyour vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and gritcan scratch the paint, while tree sapand bird droppings can permanentlyruin the finish.

Wash your vehicle in a shady area,not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle isparked in the sun, move it into theshade and let the exterior cool downbefore you start.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this owner’smanual.

Chemical solvents and strongcleaners can damage the paint, metal,and plastic on your vehicle.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly withcool water to remove loose dirt.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a product made especially forcar washing.

Wash the vehicle using water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe vehicle does not need waxing.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

As you dry the vehicle, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).426

Exterior Care

Washing

Appearance Care424

06/12/06 11:26:27 32SMR600_427

－

－Always wash and dry the wholevehicle before waxing it. You shouldwax your vehicle, including the metaltrim, whenever water sits on thesurface in large patches. It shouldform into beads or droplets afterwaxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your vehiclewhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. Youshould use a polish on your vehicle ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the vehicle doesnot need waxing.

Clean your vehicle’s aluminium alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protectiveclearcoat that keeps the aluminiumfrom corroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners or stiffbrushes, can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing Aluminium Wheels(On some models)

425

06/12/06 11:26:34 32SMR600_428

Inspect your vehicle frequently forchips or scratches in the paint.Repair them right away to preventcorrosion of the metal underneath.Use the touch-up paint only on smallchips and scratches. More extensivepaint damage should be repaired bya professional.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s colour. Thecolour code is printed on a plate onthe doorjamb on the left side. Takethis code to your dealer so you aresure to get the correct colour.

Exterior Care

Paint Touch-up

Appearance Care426

06/12/06 11:26:38 32SMR600_429

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of an anchored mat.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Carpeting Floor Mats(Optional)

427

06/12/06 11:26:45 32SMR600_430

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

If you use a leather cleaner, wipe itoff quickly with a soft and dry cloth.Never leave a cloth soaked withleather cleaner on any part of theinterior. If left for a long time, someleather cleaners may causediscolouration or cracking of interiortrim or fabric.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

The rear window demister andantenna wires are bonded to theinside of the glass. Wiping vigorouslyup-and-down can dislodge and breakthese wires. When cleaning the rearwindow, use gentle pressure andwipe side-to-side.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Vinyl

Leather WindowsFabric(On some models)

428

06/12/06 11:26:54 32SMR600_431

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up on the openings of theseat belt anchors can cause the beltsto retract slowly. Wipe the openingswith a clean cloth dampened in mildsoap and warm water or isopropylalcohol.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of yourvehicle, it is best to use a solid type.Some liquid air fresheners containchemicals that may cause parts ofthe interior trim and fabric to crackor discolour.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Seat Belts Air Fresheners

Interior Care

Appearance Care 429

OPENING

06/12/06 11:27:00 32SMR600_432

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your vehicle:

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the vehicle.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your vehicle. You canhelp keep your vehicle fromcorroding by performing somesimple periodic maintenance:

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your vehicle. Thisis especially important in areasthat use road salt in winter. It isalso a good idea in humid climatesand areas subject to salty air. Becareful of the ABS wheel sensorsand wiring at each wheel.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourvehicle inspected and repairedperiodically.

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thevehicle stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care430

06/12/06 11:27:08 32SMR600_433

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

.....................Compact Spare Tyre . 432...................Changing a Flat Tyre . 434

...................................Honda TRK . 440.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 454

................................Jump Starting . 456If the Engine Overheats

.........................(Petrol models) . 460If the Engine Overheats

.........................(Diesel models) . 462.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 464

........................Oil Level Indicator . 465..........Charging System Indicator . 466

Malfunction Indicator Lamp.........................(Petrol models) . 467

Malfunction Indicator Lamp.........................(Diesel models) . 468..........................PGM-FI Warning . 469

...............Brake System Indicator . 470..............................................Fuses . 471

Fuses Locations.........................(Petrol models) . 475

Fuses Locations.........................(Diesel models) . 477

......................Emergency Towing . 479

Taking Care of the Unexpected


431

06/12/06 11:27:12 32SMR600_434

Use the compact spare tyre as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tyre repaired orreplaced, and put it back on yourvehicle as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tyre every time youcheck the other tyres. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).

This tyre gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tyre.

Do not use your compact sparetyre on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not use more than onecompact spare tyre at the sametime.

Do not use the compact spare tyreif you are towing a trailer.

The compact spare tyre is smallerthan the regular tyre. Yourvehicle’s ground clearancereduces when the compact sparetyre is installed. Driving over roaddebris or bumps could possiblydamage the underside of yourvehicle.

Replace the tyre when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tyre, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tyre is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tyre.

Compact Spare Tyre (For some types)

Taking Care of the Unexpected432

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi)

06/12/06 11:27:22 32SMR600_435

(For Australian model) Where:‘‘A’’ kg is the maximum Load Rating‘‘B’’ is the equivalent Load Index‘‘C’’ is the Speed Category Symbol‘‘D’’ is the equivalent speed in km/h

Temporary spare tyre fitted to thisvehicle must have a maximum loadrating of not less than ‘‘A’’ kg, or aload index of ‘‘B’’ and a speedcategory symbol of not less than ‘‘C’’(‘‘D’’ km/h).Drive with caution when thetemporary spare tyre is fitted. Do notexceed 80 km/h. Re-install normalwheel as soon as possible.

C

Speed CategorySymbol

D

km/h(Speed)

A

MaximumLoad Rating

Compact Spare Tyre

Normal Tyre

Compact Spare Tyre Wheel

B

LoadIndex


Compact Spare Tyre (For some types)

433

M 130 km/h825 kg

T135/80D16 101M

225/40R18 88Y

16 x 4T

101

06/12/06 11:27:29 32SMR600_436

Turn on the hazard warningindicators, and turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position.Have all the passengers get out ofthe vehicle while you change thetyre.

The tools are in the rear left sidecompartment in the luggage area.

If you have a flat tyre while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

Use the jack that came with yourvehicle. If you try to raise anothervehicle with this jack or use anotherjack to raise your vehicle, the vehicleor jack can be damaged.

Your vehicle is equipped with thetyre sealant kit instead of the sparetyre. This kit is available for easyrepair of a flat tyre (see page ).

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in reverse. Apply theparking brake.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

2.

3.

1.

440

On vehicles with spare tyre

On vehicles with Honda TRK

Except for Type- R

Changing a Flat Tyre



434

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tyre exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only bythe jack.

SPARE TYRE

TOOL KIT

JACK

06/12/06 11:27:39 32SMR600_437

CONTINUED

Turn the jack’s end bracketanticlockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Take the tool bag out of the rearside compartment.

Remove the cover by turning thehandle anticlockwise, then pullingout the cover. Unlatch thefastening strap by squeezing thetabs.

Open the tailgate. Raise theluggage area floor by lifting up onthe strap.

Hook the strap on the back of theluggage area cover (if equipped)to keep the floor lid open.

7.

5.

4.

6.


Taking Care of the Unexpected 435

06/12/06 11:27:47 32SMR600_438

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tyre you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place blocks in front and back ofthe wheel diagonally opposite thetyre you are changing.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tyre out of its well.

Put the under-floor box back inplace, then lower the floor lid.

Remove the under-floor box andtake out the vinyl bag and the tyrenet.

13.12.

11.

10.

9.

8.



JACKING POINTWHEEL NUT WRENCH

UNDER-FLOOR BOX WHEEL NUTS

VINYL BAG, TYRE NET

06/12/06 11:27:56 32SMR600_439

CONTINUED

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Put on the spare tyre. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Before mounting the spare tyre,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tyre is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tyre. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flattyre on the ground with theoutside surface facing up.

18.

17.16.14.

15.



437

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

06/12/06 11:28:05 32SMR600_440

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.

Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Put the flat tyre in the suppliedvinyl bag.

Place the flat tyre on the luggagearea floor.

Make sure to place the under-floorstorage area lid (if equipped) onthe upper position and put the flattyre on the lid.

19. 20.

21.



108 N·m (11 kgf·m , 80 lbf·ft)

06/12/06 11:28:11 32SMR600_441

Close the tailgate.

Wrap the flat tyre with the net,then attach the other two hooks tothe same luggage hooks as shown.

Store the jack in the rear left sidecompartment. Turn the jack’s endbracket to lock it in place.

Store the tool kit in the rear leftside compartment.

Place the supplied tyre net on theluggage area, then attach the twohooks to the luggage hooks on thetailgate opening.

22. 23.

24.

25.

26.



Loose items can fly aroundthe interior in a crash andcould seriously injure theoccupants.

Store the wheel, jack, andtools securely before driving.

06/12/06 11:28:19 32SMR600_442

＊

＊

Your vehicle is not equipped with aspare tyre. Instead, your vehicle hasthe tyre sealant kit (Honda TRK:temporary repair kit of TERRA-S ).This kit is available only for easyrepair of a flat tyre.

When using the tyre sealant kit,always follow the instructions andthe procedure in this owner’s manual.

You should check the usable periodof the tyre sealant according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule .

On EU models, refer to theService Book that came with yourvehicle.

To remind you of the instructions forusing the tyre sealant kit, thehandling manual is included in thekit. Symbols on thehandling manual are to remind youto read this owner’s manual for usingthe tyre sealant kit.

Read the handling manual well anduse it correctly.

Small punctures in the tyre tread,caused by a nail or a screw, can besealed with the temporary repair kit.

The temporary repair kit cannot beused in the following cases.Inform your dealer or a RoadsideAssistance Service.

Expired best before date of thetyre sealant.

Cuts or piercing in the tyre treadlarger than approximately 4 mm.

Cuts in the tyre side wall.

Tyre damage caused by drivingwith considerably reduced tyrepressure or even with deflatedtyres.

A tyre bead completely unseatedoutside or inside of rim.

A rim damaged.

2 or more tyres punctured.:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

On vehicles with Honda TRK

Honda TRK (For some types)


06/12/06 11:28:32 32SMR600_443

Open the tailgate. Remove the sidecover by turning the handleanticlockwise. Take the Honda TRKout of the rear right sidecompartment.

Pull out a nail or a screw in thetyre tread with the pliers suppliedin the tool kit. When you can’t pullit out or you can’t find it, werecommend you to inform yourdealer or Roadside AssistanceService. The kit can also be usedto repair the tyre withoutremoving the nail or screw butonly in unavoidable cases.

1.

CONTINUED

Instructions for Use



If you drive a vehicle afterrepair without extracting anail or a screw, it may causeair leakage again or damagethe inside and burst a tyre. Ifyou have to drive, drivecarefully, especially aroundcorners.

NAIL/SCREW

PLIER

HONDA TRK

TOOL KIT

06/12/06 11:28:39 32SMR600_444

Take out the temporary repair kitand shake the bottle (A). Screwthe filler hose (B) onto the bottle(A), thereby piercing the seal ofaluminium.

2.



Harmful if swallowed.Swallow plenty of waterand seek medical adviceimmediately.

Irritating to eyes. Rinseimmediately with plenty ofwater and seek medicaladvice.

Keep locked up and out ofthe reach of children.

If you shake the bottle afterconnecting the hose withthe bottle, it may spillsealant. Shake bottle wellbefore connecting hose.

Contains ethylene glycol.CAP

(A)

(B)

(A)

AluminiumSealed

06/12/06 11:28:45 32SMR600_445

To remind you of the information forrepairing a flat tyre with this sealantkit, the labels are attached on thesealant bottle. Read the instructionscarefully. Symbols on thelabel are to remind you to read theHonda TRK section for using thetyre sealant kit.

Unscrew the valve cap (D) fromthe tyre valve (C). Deflate the tyrecompletely pushing the valveinsert using the back of the valveremover (E).

If sealant adheres to clothes, it maynot be possible to remove. Be carefulnot to spill any.

If you have any questions about thetyre sealant kit, please contact yourdealer.

3.

CONTINUED

Safety Label on the Sealant Bottle



(D)

(C)

(E)

06/12/06 11:28:53 32SMR600_446

Pull the plug from the filler hoseand slide the filler hose onto thetyre valve (C).

Unscrew the valve insert (F) usingthe valve remover (E). Do not placethe valve insert (F) in the sand ordirt.

4.



A valve insert can jump out, ifair remains in tyre. Be carefulin removing valve insert.

(C)

(E)

(F)

PLUG

FILLER HOSE

(C)

06/12/06 11:28:59 32SMR600_447

Pull off the filler hose and firmlyscrew the valve insert (F) into thetyre valve (C) using valve remover(E).

Affix a sticker of ‘‘Tyre Sealant inthe tyre’’ (G) on the wheel.

Hold the filling bottle with the fillerhose downwards and compress.Squeeze the complete content intothe tyre.

5.

CONTINUED



(F)

(C)

(E)

(G)

(C)

06/12/06 11:29:06 32SMR600_448

Affix a sticker of ‘‘Maximum Speed’’(H) within the driver’s range ofvision on the upper display.

Screw the inflation hose (J) to thetyre valve (C). Fit the plug tosocket (K) of the cigarette lighter.

To use the power plug, disengagethe safety cover by turning itclockwise. Slide it down then turnthe cover clockwise again to lock itin position.When the power plug is not in use,reverse this procedure to put thecover back in place. This helps toprotect the plug end.

6.



Do not affix a sticker on thesteering wheel. The SRS airbag may not function.

Do not affix it in the positionwhere it prevents the driverfrom seeing the warningindicators or speedometer.

(H)

SAFETYCOVER

06/12/06 11:29:13 32SMR600_449

Turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position. Turn onthe air compressor (L).Inflate the tyre to the required airpressure (M). Do not inflate the tyrefor more than 10 minutes.If overinflated, deflate air byloosening the screw of the hose.

Operate electric inflation pump fornot longer than 15 minutes. It cancause overheating.

CONTINUED



If the required air pressure isnot reached within 10minutes, the tyre may beseverely damaged.

The Tyre Sealant Kit cannotprovide the necessary seal.Inform a Honda Dealer orRoadside Assistant Service.

POWERPLUG

(M)

(K)(J)

(L) (C)AIR COMPRESSOR SWITCH

AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

ON

OFF

06/12/06 11:29:19 32SMR600_450

Continue the journey immediately.Drive carefully within the speed of80 km/h (50 mph).

After 10 minutes or 5 km (3 miles)running, check the tyre pressurewith the air compressor pressuregauge. Note that the air pressuremust be checked with the aircompressor turned off. If the tyrepressure is kept, the tyre punctureis sealed. Continue to drivecarefully to the nearest Hondadealer or a Roadside AssistanceService.

If you drive a vehicle at the speed ofmore than 80 km/h (50 mph), yourvehicle may vibrate and will not drivesafely.

If the required air pressuredropped, inflate the tyre to therequired air pressure and repeatfrom step 6.

7.

8.

9.



06/12/06 11:29:26 32SMR600_451

If the puncture hole cannot bedetected, the tyre repair shop cannotrepair the sealed tyre. When youcontinue running, check tyrepressure often and if tyre pressuredecreases, repair the sealed tyre at aHonda dealer.

A wheel can be reused afterwiping sealant with cloth, but thevalve must be replaced.

Dispose of the used bottle at aHonda dealer.

Have the tyre replaced at thenearest Honda dealer. To repairthe sealed tyre, consult yourdealer.

CONTINUED



In the following cases, do notdrive on.Inform a Honda dealer or aRoadside Assistance Service.

The tyre pressure hasdropped below 130 kPa (1.3bar, 19 psi).

The tyre pressure has stilldropped after steps 6 and 7.

06/12/06 11:29:32 32SMR600_452

To remind you of the information forrepairing a flat tyre with this sealantkit, the labels are attached on the aircompressor. The following showsyou the instructions for these labels.

Symbols on the label areto remind you to read the section ofHonda TRK for using the tyresealant kit.

Instructions for Labels on the AirCompressor



Do not run the engine inenclosed areas, or when thevehicle is supported by thejack.

Do not touch the aircompressor with handswithout protective clothing.Because it may be extremelyhot while operating.

Never use the air compressorfor 15 minutes or longer.When reusing, make sure thecompressor is cool to thetouch.

Do not use the aircompressor for any otherpurpose than inflating yourtyres.

06/12/06 11:29:39 32SMR600_453

NOTE:The power supply of the aircompressor is limited to the 12 voltDC accessories of the vehicle.

Before using the air compressor,drive your vehicle to the roadshoulder and stop in a safe place thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Remove the valve cap from a flattyre and securely connect the aircompressor hose to the valve.

Connect the power plug of the aircompressor to the socket of thecigarette lighter.

Turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position. Turn onthe air compressor switch andinflate the tyre to the specified airpressure. Check the tyre pressureby using the air pressure gauge onthe compressor.

Turn off the switch on the aircompressor before checking the airpressure.

When the tyre is inflated tospecified air pressure, disconnectthe power plug from the cigarettelighter socket. Make sure not toallow air to leak from the tyre.Then install and tighten the valvecap securely.

Remove a tyre and a wheel fromthe vehicle.Deflate tyre pressure.

Cut the valve off with a knife.

Be careful not to spill sealant from atyre.

Step 1.

Step 2.

Step 3.

Step 4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED



Directions

Sealant Extraction(For a Honda dealer)

451

06/12/06 11:29:51 32SMR600_454

Recycling sealant is important forprotecting environmental resources.Please cooperate in collecting usedsealant.

Bend the hose and tie it with thestrap or tape so that sealant doesnot leak. Dispose of the bottle atyour dealer when you replace itwith a new bottle.

Insert the hose through the valvehole into the tyre.The hose should enter the sealantas deeply as possible.

Squeeze the bottle and draw outthe sealant.(It is better to stand a tyre on atable.)

Repeat step 4 until the sealantcannot be drawn out.

Be careful not to damage the tyre orthe wheel.

3.

4.

5.

6.



Be careful not to cut a handor a finger.

06/12/06 11:29:58 32SMR600_455

To remind you of the information forextracting the used sealant, this sealis attached on the wheel. It alsoshows you the tyre has beenrepaired by the tyre sealant kit. Thefollowing shows you the instructionson this seal.

Symbols on the seal areto remind you to read this owner’smanual for extracting the usedsealant.



Sealant Label

453

The sealant containsethylene glycol.

Swallowing the sealant cancause fatal poisoning. Drinkwith large quantities of water.Call a physician immediately.

Getting the sealant in youreyes or on your skin cancause serious injury. Flushwith large quantities of waterthoroughly. Call a physicianimmediately.

Keep out of the reach ofchildren.

Make sure to keep thesealant enclosed in the bottle.

SEAL

06/12/06 11:30:05 32SMR600_456

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you pressthe ENGINE START button:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

When you press the ENGINESTART button, you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Do not hold the ENGINE STARTbutton for more than 15 seconds.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Press the ENGINE START button,then release it. If the headlights donot dim, check the condition of thefuses. If the fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine the

problem (seeon page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Press on the brakepedal and move the shift lever toneutral. Check the gear positionindicator on the upper display. If itdoes not show N, the battery isdischarged. Seeon page .

456

479

418

456

456


If the Engine Won’t Start


Jump Starting

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

454

06/12/06 11:30:15 32SMR600_457

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

After you parked the vehicle foran extended period or when theoutside temperature becomes veryhigh, water stays in the fuelsystem and the engine will notstart. In this case, you should drainthe water from the fuel filter (seepage ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you press theENGINE START button, but theengine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page on petrolmodels with manual transmission,page on petrol models withi-SHIFT, and page on dieselmodels.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

If the indicator is blinking, movethe shift lever out from neutral,then return it again while pressingon the brake pedal.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel,priming the fuel system isrequired to restart the engine (seepage ).

After you have stored your vehiclefor an extended period, air mayhave entered the fuel system (see

onpage ).

If equipped, the fuel cutoff switchmay be activated. If the switch isactivated, it must be reset beforestarting the engine (see page ).

318

319320

149

471

306

421

421

384

479

On all models

On diesel models only

EmergencyTowing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

Priming the Fuel System

If the Engine Won’t Start


06/12/06 11:30:25 32SMR600_458

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

To jump start your vehicle:

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, audio system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in neutraland set the parking brake.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can freeze.Attempting to jump start with afrozen battery can cause it to rupture.

Open the bonnet, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

Jump Starting


A battery can explode if youdo not follow the correctprocedure, seriously injuringanyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

Except Type-R

06/12/06 11:30:33 32SMR600_459

＋

＋

－

CONTINUED

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

3. 4.

Jump Starting


Except Type-RExcept Type-RType-R

Diesel models

06/12/06 11:30:42 32SMR600_460

－

On diesel modelsConnect the second jumper cable tothe negative ( ) terminal on thebooster battery. Connect the otherend to the stud bolt on the engineside as shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part of theengine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

5.

6.

Jump Starting


Type-R Diesel models

06/12/06 11:30:49 32SMR600_461

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

After jump starting, you must movethe shift lever to neutral and presson the brake pedal for about 3seconds until the gear positionindicator shows N the next time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

7. On vehicles with i-SHIFT

Jump Starting


06/12/06 11:30:53 32SMR600_462

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the bonnet.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the bonnet,turn off the engine. Wait until yousee no more signs of steam orspray, then open the bonnet.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral,and set the parking brake. Turnoff the all accessories, and turn onthe hazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

479Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats (Petrol models)


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the bonnet ifsteam is coming out.

06/12/06 11:31:02 32SMR600_463

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge, or lower,before checking the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capanticlockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

).

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat (climate control toAUTO at ‘‘ ’’). Add coolantto the radiator up to the base ofthe filler neck. If you do not havethe proper coolant mixtureavailable, you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

10.

304

479Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats (Petrol models)


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to sprayout, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

06/12/06 11:31:09 32SMR600_464

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.It may go higher if you are driving upa long steep hill on a very hot day. Ifit climbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Your vehicle can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the bonnet.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutraland set the parking brake. Turnoff the climate control system andall other accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the bonnet,turn off the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point, then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thebonnet.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

If the Engine Overheats (Diesel models)


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the bonnet ifsteam is coming out.

06/12/06 11:31:18 32SMR600_465

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theexpansion tank (see page ).

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat (climate control toAUTO at ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant upto the MAX line on the expansiontank. If you do not have the propercoolant mixture available, you canadd plain water. Remember tohave the cooling system drainedand refilled with the propermixture as soon as you can.

If the expansion tank needscoolant, you will have to removethe cap. Before doing that, turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and check thetemperature gauge. Remove theexpansion tank cap only if thetemperature gauge pointer hascome down to normal or below thered mark and you do not hear anybubbling or gurgling noisescoming from the cooling system.

Use a cloth or glove to protectyour hand while removing theexpansion tank cap. Loosen thecap by turning it 1/8 turn anticlock-wise. Stop and wait for any pres-sure in the expansion tank toescape. Then remove the cap byturning it anticlockwise.

Put the expansion tank cap backon tightly. Run the engine, andcheck the temperature gauge. If itgoes back to the red mark, theengine needs repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theexpansion tank. If it has gonedown, add coolant to the MAXmark. Put the expansion tank capback on tightly.

9.

8.

7.

6. 10.

11.

12.

479

305

479

EmergencyTowing

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Overheats (Diesel models)


Removing the expansiontank cap while the engine ishot can cause the coolant tospray out, seriously scaldingyou.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the expansion tankcap.

06/12/06 11:31:26 32SMR600_466

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is in the ON (II)position, and go out after the enginestarts. It should never come on whenthe engine is running. If it startsflashing or stays on, the oil pressurehas dropped very low or lostpressure. Serious engine damage ispossible and you should takeimmediate action.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause seriousmechanical damage almostimmediately. Turn off the engine assoon as you can safely get thevehicle stopped.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the bonnet, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmanoeuvres.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with an ‘‘OILPRESSURE LOW’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

1.

2.

4.

3.

104

368

302

479

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


06/12/06 11:31:34 32SMR600_467

Your vehicle has an engine oil levelsensor to check the oil level. If thesymbol ‘‘ ’’ for the oil levelindicator comes on on the multi-information display when the engineis running, the engine oil level is low.You will also hear a beep when thissymbol comes on. If you select thewarning symbol with the message(s)in the customizing settings, you willsee this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display (see

page ). The oil level symbol/messagedisplay can be reset each time youturn off the engine. When you startyour trip again, the system begins tomonitor the engine oil level. It maytake a while until the system sensesthe engine oil level is low and thesymbol, or the symbol with amessage appear on the multi-information display. You shouldcheck the engine oil level and addengine oil before driving again if theoil level symbol, or the symbol with a‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’message comes on.

If this symbol comes on, safely pulloff the road, park the vehicle on levelground, turn off the engine and letthe vehicle sit for approximately 3minutes.

Do not fill above the upper mark onthe dipstick and do not spill theengine oil in the engine compartment.This could damage the engine andother components.

If you do not carry spare engine oil inyour vehicle, drive moderately to thenearest service area and add engineoil. Avoid full-throttle accelerationand driving at high speed.

Check the oil level. If the engine oillevel is near or below the lower markon the dipstick, you should add theengine oil (see page on petrolmodels, and page on dieselmodels).

103

368370

CONTINUED

Oil Level Indicator


OIL LEVEL INDICATOR

06/12/06 11:31:43 32SMR600_468

If you ignore the oil level indicatorand keep driving with this indicatoron, you can seriously damage theengine.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is in the ON (II)position, and go out after the enginestarts. If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. You will also see thesymbol ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbol witha ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a dealer or a service stationwhere you can get technicalassistance.

This system activates after theengine warms up. If the outsidetemperature is extremely low, youmay have to drive for a long timeuntil the system senses the engineoil level.

If the symbol ‘‘ ,’’ or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay when the engine is running,there is a system problem in theengine oil level sensor. You will alsohear a beep. Have your dealerinspect your vehicle as soon aspossible.

105

Charging SystemIndicator

Oil Level Sensor Failure

Oil Level Indicator, Charging System Indicator


06/12/06 11:31:52 32SMR600_469

＊

＊


If this indicator comes on, safely pulloff the road and turn off the engine.Restart the engine and watch theindicator. If it stays on, have yourvehicle checked by the dealer assoon as possible. Drive moderatelyuntil the dealer has inspected theproblem. Avoid full-throttle

acceleration and driving at highspeed.

If you keep driving with themalfunction indicator lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if the indicatorcomes on frequently, even though itgoes off when you follow the aboveprocedure.

On European models, if youturn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, withoutstarting the engine, themalfunction indicator lamp willcome on for about 20 seconds. Itthen goes off or blinks 5 timesunder various conditions. This isnormal: it shows the self-testingcondition of the diagnostics forthe emissions control systems.

This indicator comes on fora few seconds when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position . If the indicator comeson while driving, it means one of theengine’s emissions control systemsmay have a problem. Even thoughyou may feel no difference in yourvehicle’s performance, it can reduceyour fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

:

104

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Petrol models)


06/12/06 11:31:59 32SMR600_470


This indicator comes on fora few seconds when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates one of theemissions control systems may havea problem. Even though you mayfeel no difference in your vehicle’sperformance, it can reduce your fueleconomy and cause your vehicle toput out excessive emissions.continued operation may causeserious damage.

If this indicator comes on, safely pulloff the road and turn off the engine.Restart and turn off the engine atleast three times at intervals ofapproximately 30 seconds, thenwatch the indicator. If it stays on,have your vehicle checked by your

dealer as soon as possible. Drivemoderately until the dealer hasinspected the problem. Avoid full-throttle acceleration and driving athigh speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if the indicatorcomes on frequently, even though itgoes off when you follow the aboveprocedure.

If you keep driving with themalfunction indicator lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

This indicator will also come on andyou cannot restart the engine afteryour vehicle has run out of fuel. Ifthis occurs, refuel the fuel tank, thenfollow the procedure for

on page beforeattempting to restart the engine.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, without starting theengine, the malfunction indicatorlamp will come on for about 20seconds. It then goes off or blinks 5times under various conditions. Thisis normal: it shows the self-testingcondition of the diagnostics for theemissions control systems.

421

104

Primingthe Fuel System

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Diesel models)


06/12/06 11:32:06 32SMR600_471

If this symbol or the symbol with amessage is displayed, safely pull offthe road and turn off the engine.Restart and turn off the engine atleast three times at intervals ofapproximately 30 seconds, then

watch the multi-information display.If it appears again, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this symbol‘‘ ’’ appears on the multi-information display frequently, eventhough it goes off when you followthe above procedure.

If you keep driving with the symbol‘‘ ’’ on, you can damage yourvehicle’s emissions controls andengine. Those repairs may not becovered by your vehicle’s warranties.

This symbol or the symbol with amessage will also appear on themulti-information display and youcannot restart the engine after yourvehicle has run out of fuel. If thisoccurs, refuel the fuel tank, thenfollow the procedure for

on page beforeattempting to restart the engine.

This symbol or the symbol with amessage may also appear if you donot use the proper fuel for theclimate or regional condition. Thismay cause the engine power toreduce (see page ).

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information displaywhile the engine is running, there isa problem in the engine controlsystem. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

421

299

On diesel models

Primingthe Fuel System

PGM-FI Warning


06/12/06 11:32:14 32SMR600_472

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

The brake system indicatornormally comes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, and as a reminderto check the parking brake. It willstay on if you do not fully release theparking brake.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘BRAKEFLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-information display.

You will also see the symbol ‘‘ ,’’or this symbol with a ‘‘CHECKSYSTEM’’ message in the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the brake system.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthe brake system indicator, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

378

479Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator


06/12/06 11:32:24 32SMR600_473

The vehicle’s fuses are located intwo fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left corner.

The under-bonnet fuse box is locatedin the back of the enginecompartment on the left side. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

Fuses


Diesel modelsUNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX

TAB

Petrol modelsUNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX

TAB

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

06/12/06 11:32:31 32SMR600_474

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

On the under-bonnet fuse box,remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-bonnet fuse box bylooking through the side windowat the wire inside. Remove thescrews with a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and on petrol models, andpages and on diesel models,or the diagram on the fuse box lid,which fuse or fuses control thatdevice. Check those fuses first, butcheck all the fuses before decidingthat a blown fuse is the cause.Replace any blown fuses, and checkif the device works. 3.

2.

1.

475 476477 478

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


BLOWNFUSE

BLOWN

FUSE

06/12/06 11:32:38 32SMR600_475

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-bonnet fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-bonnet fuse box.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned out, replace itwith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the cigarettelighter or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

5.4.

CONTINUED

Fuses


FUSE PULLER BLOWN

06/12/06 11:32:45 32SMR600_476

＋

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement fuse with the properrating for the circuit, install one witha lower rating.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

To check the battery fuse, removethe cover on the positive ( )terminal on the battery.

6.

Fuses


FUSE

Petrol model with manualtransmission is shown. Type-R

FUSE

06/12/06 11:32:51 32SMR600_477

＊

＊

The fuses contained in the under-bonnet fuse box varyslightly depending on models. The locations of fuses areshown with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the tablebelow for the fuses on your vehicle.

For some types

1

2

3

456789101112

13141516171819202122232425262728

LAF SensorIG CoilSub FanBack UpInterior LightMain FanBlowerOil Level SensorHorn, StopHazardNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedNot Used

Main Fuse BatteryEPSHeadlight MainIgnition Switch MainVSA Motor/ABS MotorVSA F/S/ABS F/SOption Maini-SHIFTPower Window MainMG ClutchThrottle Control RelayIG PowerNot UsedNot UsedRear Demister

:

No. No. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

CONTINUED

Fuse Locations (Petrol models)


UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX

06/12/06 11:32:59 32SMR600_478

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

The fuses contained in the interior fuse box vary slightlydepending on models. The locations of fuses are shownwith symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the table belowfor the fuses on your vehicle.

No. No.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected123456789

1011121314151617181920 For some types

21222324252627282930

3132333435363738

Power WindowFuel PumpIG1 ACGABS UnitHeated SeatsFront Fog LightsDaytime Running LightsIG1 STARTODS (Occupant DetectionSystem)MeterSRSRight Headlight High BeamLeft Headlight High BeamSmall Lights (Interior)Small Lights (Exterior)Right Headlight Low BeamLeft Headlight Low BeamHeadlight High Beam MainSmall Lights MainRear Fog Light

Headlight Low Beam MainShifterStart SignalSunshadesDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedRear Accessory SocketAccessoryFront Passenger’s PowerWindowHeadlight WasherNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedAccessory, RadioIG2 HACDaytime LightFront Wiper

:

Fuse Locations (Petrol models)


INTERIOR FUSE BOX

06/12/06 11:33:06 32SMR600_479

The fuses contained in the under-bonnet fuse box varyslightly depending on models. The locations of fuses areshown with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the tablebelow for the fuses on your vehicle.

No. Circuits ProtectedNo.Circuits Protected

CONTINUED

1

2

3

456789101112

Not UsedNot UsedMain FanBack UpInterior LightSub FanBlowerNot UsedHorn, StopHazardFuel HeaterISV (Intake ShutterValve)Fuel Heater MonitorPTC1 (PositiveTemperature CoefficientHeater System)PTC2PTC3

131415161718192021222324

2526

2728

Main Fuse BatteryEPSHeadlight MainIgnition Switch MainVSA MotorVSA F/SOption MainGlowPower Window MainMG ClutchIGP2IGPNot UsedNot UsedRear Demister

Fuse Locations (Diesel models)


UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX

06/12/06 11:33:13 32SMR600_480

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

The fuses contained in the interior fuse box vary slightlydepending on models. The locations of fuses are shownwith symbols on the fuse label. Refer to the table belowfor the fuses on your vehicle.

No. No.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132333435363738

For some types

Power WindowFuel PumpIG1 ACGABS UnitHeated SeatsFront Fog LightsDaytime Running LightsIG1 STARTODS (Occupant DetectionSystem)MeterSRSRight Headlight High BeamLeft Headlight High BeamSmall Lights (Interior)Small Lights (Exterior)Right Headlight Low BeamLeft Headlight Low BeamHeadlight High Beam MainSmall Lights MainRear Fog Light

Headlight Low Beam MainShifterStart SignalSunshadesDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedRear Accessory SocketAccessoryFront Passenger’s PowerWindowHeadlight WasherNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedAccessory, RadioIG2 HACDaytime LightFront Wiper

:

Fuse Locations (Diesel models)


INTERIOR FUSE BOX

06/12/06 11:33:21 32SMR600_481

－

－

－

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tyres and lift themoff the ground. The other two reartyres remain on the ground.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension and

the cables lift that end of the vehicleoff the ground. Your vehicle’ssuspension and body can beseriously damaged.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do the following:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If youcannot shift the transmission, yourvehicle must be transported with thefront wheels off the ground.

If the gear position indicator doesnot show N with the ignition switchin the ON (II) position, thetransmission may not be shifted toneutral. In this case, your vehiclemust be transported with the frontwheels off the ground.

Turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

Make sure that the gear positionindicator shows N.

Shift to N.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Release the parking brake.

Manual transmission:

i-SHIFT (automated manualtransmission):


CONTINUED

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

This method oftowing is unacceptable.

Emergency Towing


06/12/06 11:33:34 32SMR600_482

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle bythe bumpers will cause seriousdamage. The bumpers are notdesigned to support the vehicle’sweight.

The steering system can bedamaged if the steering wheel islocked. Leave the ignition switch inthe ACCESSORY (I) position, andmake sure the steering wheel turnsfreely before you begin towing.

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed above, and leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) position so the steering wheeldoes not lock. Make sure the radioand any electrical accessories areturned off so they do not run downthe battery.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 80 km (50 miles), and keep thespeed below 55 km/h (35 mph).

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Do not tie down the vehicle at anangle with which the towing cableshit against the vehicle’s frontbumper. To avoid your vehicle fromdamaging, protect the front bumperwith a tape.

Emergency Towing


06/12/06 11:33:40 32SMR600_483

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see the previous page).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can usethe detachable front towing hookequipped with your vehicle. Makesure to use the properly-designedand attached towing equipment.

To attach the front towing hook onthe left of the front bumper on yourvehicle:

Take the front towing hook, thewheel nut wrench and the flat-tipped screwdriver out of the toolkit bag in the left side storage inthe luggage area.

Remove the cover from thebumper by pushing the rightcorner edge of the cover with yourfinger.

1.

2.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Emergency Towing


TOOL KIT

06/12/06 11:33:48 32SMR600_484

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle bythe bumpers will cause seriousdamage. The bumpers are notdesigned to support the vehicle’sweight.

If you slip the clutch for a long timewhile trying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat and damage thetransmission. Use a tow service toprevent transmission damage.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe front towing hook for straight,flat ground towing only. Do not towat an angle. This hook should not beused for open-road towing.

Screw the front towing hook intothe bolt hole behind the bumperthrough the opening and tightenthe hook securely by the wheelnut wrench.

3.

Emergency Towing


WHEEL NUT WRENCH

06/12/06 11:33:53 32SMR600_485

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers.

................Identification Numbers . 484................................Specifications . 487

Three Way Catalytic Converter.........................(Petrol models) . 493

Catalytic Converter.........................(Diesel models) . 494

Technical Information

Technical Information 483

06/12/06 11:33:57 32SMR600_486

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The chassis number is stamped onthe fire wall.

The engine number is stampedinto the engine block.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Do not mistake the transmissionnumber for the engine number.

1.

2.

3.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information484

ENGINE NUMBER

Except Type-R

Type-R

ENGINE NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

i-SHIFT (AUTOMATED MANUALTRANSMISSION) NUMBER

06/12/06 11:34:05 32SMR600_487

On some types, a certification plateis attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)/chassis number also appearson a plate fastened to the top of thedashboard on some types.

The chassis and engine numbersalso appear on the plate attached tothe driver’s doorjamb.

CONTINUED



ENGINE NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSIONNUMBER

Diesel models

06/12/06 11:34:11 32SMR600_488

＊

＊

＊

The vehicle identification number(VIN)/chassis number is mouldedon the fire wall in the enginecompartment. To access this number,remove the lid on the back of theengine compartment. Make sure toreinstall the lid before closing thebonnet.

is the calendar monthand the year in which the body shelland power train sub-assemblies areconjoined and the vehicle is driven ormoved from the production line.

information appearson the plate on the top of thedashboard.

On Australian model, the complianceplate is attached to the left sidedoorjam.

On Australian model



BUILT DATEBUILT DATE

486

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)/CHASSIS NUMBER

: Australian model only

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)/BUILT DATE PLATE

CHASSIS AND ENGINENUMBER PLATE/CERTIFICATION PLATE/COMPLIANCE PLATE

06/12/06 11:34:17 32SMR600_489

＊＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Specifications


The towbar mounting point/rear

over hang of coupling device

Dimensions

(Except Type-R) 655 mm (25.8 in)

538 mm (21.2 in)621 mm (24.4 in)

4,270 mm (168.1 in)

325 mm (12.8 in)1,014 mm (39.9 in)1,025 mm (40.4 in)1,125 mm (44.3 in)863 mm (34.0 in)

marks show towbar fixing points.mark shows towbar coupling point.

DimensionsNo.(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Length

WidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

1,530 mm (60.2 in)1,505 mm (59.3 in)2,620 mm (103.1 in)

1,460 mm (57.5 in)1,785 mm (70.3 in)4,285 mm (168.7 in)

1,445 mm (56.9 in)

NOTE:1.2.

FrontRear

(8)

1 :2 :

Australian modelType-R (5)

(1)(2)(3)

(4)

(6)(7)

1

2

06/12/06 11:34:30 32SMR600_490

－－－－－－

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications


Weights

1,196 1,317 kg (2,637 2,903 lbs)1,267 1,357 kg (2,793 2,992 lbs)1,313 1,453 kg (2,895 3,203 lbs)

1,750 kg (3,858 lbs)

835 kg (1,841 lbs)

830 kg (1,830 lbs)

1,085 kg (2,392 lbs)

940 kg (2,072 lbs)

1,890 kg (4,167 lbs)1,700 kg (3,748 lbs)

980 kg (2,161 lbs)

740 kg (1,631 lbs)

Max. towing weight(EU)

The maximum permissiblevertical load on the couplingdevice (EU)

Curb weight

Max. permissible weight

Max. permissible axle weight(Front)

Max. permissible axle weight(Rear)

Max. loaded vehicle weight(ADR)

1,700 kg (3,748 lbs)

1,400 kg (3,086 lbs)1,500 kg (3,307 lbs)500 kg (1,102 lbs)

75 kg (165 lbs)

The maximum trailer weight is valid for 12 % slope. For anincreasing of the trailer weight you have to look in your vehiclepaper or ask your next dealer.

Diesel models

3 :

1 :

2 :

4 :

The following is for Germany only.

Trailer withbrakesTrailer withoutbrakes

See the plate attached to the doorjamb on the left side or askdealer for information.

Petrol engine model5 : Australian model

1.8 models2.0 models (Type-R)Diesel models




3

1

1

1

5

4

2

Except Type-R

06/12/06 11:34:42 32SMR600_491

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

CONTINUED

Specifications


Engine (Diesel models)Engine (Petrol models)

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC i-VTEC in line,

4-cylinder gasoline engine85 x 97.1 mm (3.35 x 3.82 in)

2,204 cm (134 cu-in)16.7 : 1

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratio

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC inline, 4-cylinder diesel engine with

turbo charger, intercooler

SKJ20DR-M11SIZFR6K-11S

10.5 : 1

1,799 cm (110 cu-in)

81 x 87.3 mm (3.19 x 3.44 in)86 x 86 mm (3.39 x 3.39 in)

1,998 cm (122 cu-in)

11.0 : 1

IFR7G-11KSSK22PR-M11S

Water cooled 4-strokeDOHC i-VTEC in line,

4-cylinder gasoline engine

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

CompressionratioSpark plugs

2 :1 : Type-R

Ask your dealer for replacement.

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

06/12/06 11:34:55 32SMR600_492

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊＊＊＊

Specifications


CapacitiesCapacities

50 (13.2 US gal , 11.0 Imp gal)

With headlight washerWithout headlight washer

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine0.6 (0.16 US gal , 0.13 Imp gal)

Including the coolant in the expansion tank and that remaining inthe engine. Expansion tank capacity:

0.5 (0.13 US gal , 0.11 Imp gal)

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

5.8 (6.1 US qt , 5.1 Imp qt)2.5 (2.6 US qt , 2.2 Imp qt)2.5 (2.6 US qt , 2.2 Imp qt)2.2 (2.3 US qt , 1.9 Imp qt)

1.6 (1.7 US qt , 1.4 Imp qt)

Manual transmission fluid(including i-SHIFT)

Manual transmission fluid

Windscreen washer reservoir

1.4 (1.5 US qt , 1.2 Imp qt)

6.6 (1.74 US gal , 1.45 Imp gal)

6.8 (1.80 US gal , 1.50 Imp gal)7.8 (2.06 US gal , 1.72 Imp gal)

6.8 (7.2 US qt , 6.0 Imp qt)4.5 (4.8 US qt , 4.0 Imp qt)



4.4 (1.16 US gal , 0.97 Imp gal)

6.6 (1.74 US gal , 1.45 Imp gal)

4.4 (4.6 US qt , 3.9 Imp qt)

4.2 (4.4 US qt , 3.7 Imp qt)

5.5 (5.8 US qt , 4.8 Imp qt)

1.9 (2.0 US qt , 1.7 Imp qt)

2.0 (2.1 US qt , 1.8 Imp qt)5.3 (1.40 US gal , 1.17 Imp gal)

Fuel tank

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Approx.

1 :

2 :3 :

4 :5 :6 :7 :

Diesel modelsPetrol engine model:

Petrol engine model

8 : Type-R

Change

Total

ChangeTotal

Change

Total

ChangeIncludingfilter

Withoutfilter

Total

5

2

1, 3

4

8

8

6

7

8

5

2

8

5

2

8

5

2

8

5

2

8

5

2

06/12/06 11:35:11 32SMR600_493

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED


Specifications

491

Suspension

Steering

Clutch

Brake

Tyres

Alignment

0.0 mm (0.00 in)

Type

Type

Type

TypeFrontRearParking

Dry, single plate, diaphragm spring

StrutTorsion beam

Rack and pinion, with electricalpower assistance

Power assistedVentilated discSolid discMechanical

4.0 mm (0.16 in)

Size/Pressure See tyre information label ondriver’s doorjamb or ask dealerfor information.

Toe-in

Camber

Caster4°26’4°14’

1°

0°5.0 mm (0.20 in)

0°6’

in

FrontRear

: Type-R

FrontRear

Front

RearFront

in

07/04/12 14:35:50 32SMR600_494

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊－

＊

－－－－－

－－－－－－

－－－－－

－－－

＊＊

＊

Specifications


Battery

Fuses (Petrol models)

Fuses(Diesel models)

Lights

12 V12 V 55 W

Capacity 55 W

On vehicles with high voltage discharge type low beamheadlights, replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should beperformed by your dealer.

12 V 5 W

12 V

12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V

5 W

21 W

21/5 W21 W

5 W21 W

12 V12 V

35 W12 V

16 W

12 V 55 W

5 W8 W12 V

12 V 2 W

NOTE:Replacement of the side turn signal light in the outside mirrors and thehigh-mount brake light should be done by your dealer.

For some types

12 V 2 W

12 V12 V12 V

36 AH/5 HR45 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-bonnet

Interior

Under-bonnet

59 AH/5 HR74 AH/20 HR12 V

Headlights

Front turn signal lightsFront position lightsSide turn signal lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/tail-lightsBack-up lightsRear fog lightFront fog lightsLicence plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightCeiling lights

Glove box lightVanity mirror lightsLuggage area light

See page 476 or the fuse labelattached to the lower dashboard.See page 475 or the fuse boxcover.

See page 478 or the fuse labelattached to the lower dashboard.See page 477 or the fuse boxcover.

Diesel models

(AMBER)

FrontRear

1 :

(D2R)

See note below.

(H11)

See note below.

High beamLow beam

1 :2 :

(H1)(H7)

Petrol models

2 :

2

2

1

2

1

1

2

06/12/06 11:35:50 32SMR600_495

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’sperformance. Follow theseguidelines to protect your vehicle’sthree way catalytic converter.

Always use unleaded petrol. Evena small amount of leaded petrolcan contaminate the catalystmetals, making the three waycatalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring,backfiring, stalling, or otherwisenot running properly.


Three Way Catalytic Converter (Petrol models)

493

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER


THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

06/12/06 11:35:59 32SMR600_496

The catalytic converter containsprecious metals that serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is equippedwith your vehicle to reduce HC, CO,NOx and PM. A replacement unitmust be an original Honda part or itsequivalent.

Always use only diesel fuelrecommended in this owner’smanual (see page ).299


Catalytic Converters (Diesel models)

494

OXIDATION CATALYTIC CONVERTERWITHOUT DPF

06/12/06 11:36:04 32SMR600_497

CONTINUED

The DPF system requires no regularmaintenance. If you drive for longperiods at slow speeds, particulatematter (PM) will be accumulatedand the regeneration of DPF will berequired. The condition of theaccumulated PM will vary with thetype of diesel fuel. Always use therecommended diesel fuel in thisowner’s manual (see page ).

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘DPF REGENERATIONREQUIRED’’ message on the multi-information display while the engineis running, it means the dieselparticulate filter (DPF) should beregenerated to remove theaccumulated particulate matter (PM).

Your vehicle is equipped with thediesel particulate filter (DPF) systemto remove the particulate matter(PM) from the exhaust gas. TheDPF is installed in the catalyticconverter.

The PM will be burnt out andremoved from the DPF at aperiodically high temperature of thecatalytic converter while driving.While the PM is burnt, you maynotice some changes on theinstrument panel and the exhaustgas. You may notice some whitesmoke in the exhaust gas. Theaverage fuel consumption on themulti-information display will beincreased temporarily.

299



DPF (Regeneration Required)

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)System(For some types)

495

OXIDATION CATALYTIC CONVERTERWITH DPF

06/12/06 11:36:12 32SMR600_498

If you ignore this symbol/messageand continue driving, the DPF andyour vehicle’s emission controlsystems will be seriously damaged.

The catalytic converter and DPFsystem must operate at a hightemperature for the chemicalreactions to take place. It can set onfire any combustible materials thatcome near it. Park your vehicle awayfrom high grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

If you see this symbol or this symbolwith a ‘‘CHECK SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information displaywhile the engine is running, it meansthe diesel particulate filter (DPF) isclogged with accumulatedparticulate matter (PM) and itshould be checked, then repaired orreplaced. Take your vehicle to aHonda dealer as soon as possible.

If you ignore this symbol/messageand continue driving, the systemwarning switches to the symbol/message of DPF (check system). Ifthis happens, take your vehicle to aHonda dealer as soon as possible tohave the DPF system checked.

To regenerate the DPF, when trafficallows, maintain a vehicle speed of atleast 60 km/h (37 mph) and continueto drive until the symbol/messagegoes out (it may take about 15minutes, depending on drivingconditions). This will increase theexhaust temperature and help toburn and remove the PM from theDPF.



DPF (Check System)

496

06/12/06 11:36:19 32SMR600_499

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 77, 466............................Jump Starting . 456

..............................Maintenance . 418............................Specifications . 492

..............................Before Driving . 297..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 22

.........................Beverage Holders . 178....................Bonnet, Opening the . 301

..................................Booster Seats . 61Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 339.............Break-in, New Linings . 298

............Bulb Replacement . 396, 398...........................................Fluid . 378

.......................................Parking . 174.................System Indicator . 77, 470

........................Wear Indicators . 338.............................Braking System . 338

.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 298Brightness Control,

...............................Instruments . 144......................Brights, Headlights . 140

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 398

.....................Brake Lights . 396, 398.......................Front Fog Lights . 399

...............Front Position Lights . 394.................................Headlights . 387

...........................Interior Lights . 401.................Licence Plate Lights . 398

..........................Rear Fog Light . 398........................Rear Lights . 396, 398

............................Specifications . 492....................Turn Signal Lights . 395

......................Bulbs, Halogen . 387, 399

...Accessories and Modifications . 308ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 150.............Accessory Power Socket . 179

........Adding Engine Coolant . 372, 374...........Additives, Engine Oil . 368, 370

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 12, 27...................................Air Bleeding . 421

....Air Cleaner Element . 380, 381, 383..............Air Conditioning System . 195

..............................Maintenance . 405.................................Usage . 191, 198

...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 189, 195......................Air Pressure, Tyres . 411

.....Aluminium Wheels, Cleaning . 425..............................Antifreeze . 372, 374

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...............................Indicator . 78, 339

...................................Operation . 339Anti-theft Steering Column

............................................Lock . 149..........................Appearance Care . 423

...........................................Ashtray . 183................................Audio System . 212

........................Automatic Heating . 193Automatic Lighting Feature

...................................Operation . 141.......................System Warning . 109

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 24

Index

A

B

497

06/12/06 11:36:24 32SMR600_500

............................Capacities Chart . 490.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 65

.........................Carrying Luggage . 310Cassette Player

............................................Care . 237...........................Operation . 235, 265

..............Catalytic Converter . 493, 494..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

.........................................CD Care . 268..........................CD Changer . 231, 261

CD Changer Error...........................Messages . 234, 264

..............................CD Player . 225, 254.CD Player Error Messages . 233, 263

................................Ceiling Lights . 183...............................Centre Pocket . 182

.........................Certification Plate . 486................................Chains, Tyres . 416

...................Changing a Flat Tyre . 434Changing Oil

......................................When to . 357...Charging System Indicator . 77, 466

...................Chassis Number . 484, 486............Checklist, Before Driving . 317

................Child Restraint Systems . 44.....................Lower Anchorages . 49

................Tether Anchor Points . 58....Child Restraint Systems for EU . 47

.....................................Child Safety . 34..............................Booster Seats . 61

............Child Restraint Systems . 44Important Safety

.............................Reminders . 34, 39..........................................Infants . 41

..........................Larger Children . 60.....................Lower Anchorages . 49

................Risks with Airbags . 35, 38.............................Small Children . 43

.........................................Tethers . 58.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 35

..........................Cigarette Lighter . 182...Cleaner Element, Air . 380, 381, 383

Cleaning...................Aluminium Wheels . 425

......................................Exterior . 424.......................................Interior . 427

...................................Seat Belts . 429...........................................Vinyl . 428

....................................Windows . 428..............................................Clock . 270

...................................Clutch Fluid . 379......................................Coat Hook . 179

Cold Weather, Starting.................................in . 318, 319, 320

.....................Compact Spare Tyre . 432.................Console Compartment . 177

.............Controls, Instruments and . 69Coolant

................................Adding . 372, 374....................................Checking . 304

.................Proper Solution . 372, 374...................Temperature Gauge . 86

....................Corrosion Protection . 430................Cruise Control Indicator . 81............Cruise Control Operation . 276

...................................Cup Holders . 178.....................Customized Settings . 110

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 70

..............Daytime Running Lights . 141.................................Dead Battery . 456

....................Default Settings . 110, 132

Index

C

D

498

06/12/06 11:36:28 32SMR600_501

CONTINUED

Defrosting the....................Windows . 192, 202, 208

..............Demister, Rear Window . 145.....................................Diesel Fuel . 299....................................Dimensions . 487

.............Dimming the Headlights . 140Dipstick

..................................Engine Oil . 302........................Directional Signals . 140

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 338............................Disc Player . 225, 254

Doors............Locking and Unlocking . 151

....................Power Door Locks . 151Downshifting, Manual

.............................Transmission . 322...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

...........................................Driving . 315....................................Economy . 307

.........................In Bad Weather . 343...........................Driving, i-SHIFT . 326

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 406

..............................Economy, Fuel . 307

Electric Power Steering (EPS).......................................Indicator . 80

.......................................Symbol . 106..................................Emergencies . 431

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 456...........Brake System Indicator . 470

...............Changing a Flat Tyre . 434.....Charging System Indicator . 466

..................Checking the Fuses . 471.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 145

...............................Honda TRK . 440........i-SHIFT System Indicator . 336

............................Jump Starting . 456.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 464

Malfunction Indicator..............................Lamp . 467, 468

....................Oil Level Indicator . 465..........Overheated Engine . 460, 462

.......................................Towing . 479........................Tyre Sealant Kit . 440.........................Emergency Brake . 174

....................Emergency Flashers . 145......................Emergency Towing . 479

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 86

.........................If It Won’t Start . 454

Malfunction Indicator........................Lamp . 76, 467, 468

............Oil Level Indicator . 103, 465........Oil Pressure Indicator . 77, 464......Oil, What Kind to Use . 368, 370

.......................Overheating . 460, 462............................Specifications . 489

..........Starting (Diesel models) . 320Starting (Petrol models with

......................................M/T) . 318Starting (Petrol models with

.................................i-SHIFT) . 319.............Engine Coolant . 304, 372, 374....................Engine Number . 484, 485...............................Exhaust Fumes . 65....................Expansion Tank . 305, 374

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 424

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 428..................Fan, Interior . 191, 201, 207

.........................................Features . 187....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 299

Index

E

F

499

06/12/06 11:36:33 32SMR600_502

Filters................Air Cleaner . 380, 381, 383

.........................Dust and Pollen . 406.............................................Fuel . 384

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 145..................Flat Tyre, Changing a . 434

.....................................Floor Mats . 427Fluids

..........................................Brake . 378.........................................Clutch . 379

..............Manual Transmission . 377...............Windscreen Washers . 376

...................Folding Door Mirrors . 173.........................Folding Rear Seat . 164........................Four-way Flashers . 145

............................Front Airbags . 12, 28...........................Front Fog Lights . 143

......................................Front Seat . 160....................................Adjusting . 160

...................................Airbags . 12, 27

.......................................Heaters . 166.........................................Fuel . 298, 299

...........................Cutoff System . 306.........................................Diesel . 299

......................Fill Door and Cap . 299...........................................Filter . 384

...........................................Gauge . 86.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 83

................Octane Requirement . 298........................Tank, Refueling . 299

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 471

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 86

...............................................Fuel . 86...............................Speedometer . 86

.................................Tachometer . 86................Gear Position Indicator . 326

Gearshift Lever Positions..............Manual Transmission . 322

..............................Glass Cleaning . 428......................................Glove Box . 176

......................Glow Plugs Indicator . 77

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 387Hands-Free Telephone (HFT)

........................................System . 279............Hazard Warning Flashers . 145

Headlights.....................................Adjuster . 146

........................................Aiming . 387.........Daytime Running Lights . 141

..................High Beam Indicator . 82..........Low Beams, Turning on . 140

......................Reminder Beeper . 140Replacing Halogen

......................................Bulbs . 387.................................Turning on . 140

.......................................Washer . 137............................Head Restraints . 162

...............................Heated Mirror . 173...................................Heater, Seat . 166

.........Heating, Automatic System . 193Heating and Cooling System

.....................Automatic System . 195High Altitude, Starting

.................................at . 318, 319, 320...............High-Low Beam Switch . 140..............High-mount Brake Light . 386

...................................Honda TRK . 440...........................................Horn . 3, 135

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 379

Index

G

H

500

06/12/06 11:36:38 32SMR600_503

CONTINUED

Identification Number,.......................................Vehicle . 486

Ignition............................................Keys . 148

.........................................Switch . 149......................Immobilizer System . 149

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......................Indicators . 72, 73, 74, 75

...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 78Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 77, 470................Charging System . 77, 466

.............................Cruise Control . 81...............................................EPS . 80

...................................Glow Plugs . 77

...................................High Beam . 82...........................i-SHIFT System . 79

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 78......................................Low Fuel . 83

................Low Oil Pressure . 77, 464Malfunction Indicator

..............................Lamp . 467, 468.............................Oil Level . 103, 465

...............................................SRS . 79

.........................System Message . 79Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 82.......................................VSA . 81, 341

....................VSA Activation . 81, 341...Indicators, Instrument Panel . 72, 76

...............................Infant Restraint . 41......................................Infant Seats . 41

.....................Lower Anchorages . 49................Tether Anchor Points . 58

..................Inflation, Proper Tyre . 411.................................Inside Mirror . 172

............................Inspection, Tyre . 412..........Instrument Panel . 72, 73, 74, 75

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 144...........................Interior Cleaning . 427

...............................Interior Lights . 183.................................Interface Dial . 188

........................................Introduction . ii-SHIFT (Automated Manual

Transmission)...................................Operation . 326

...............................Indicator . 79, 336...................Transmission Fluid . 377

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 436......................................Jack, Tyre . 435

................................Jump Starting . 456

................................................Keys . 148

.......................Label, Certification . 486...............Lane Change, Signaling . 140

......................Language Selection . 130

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 23Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 385.....................Indicator . 72, 73, 74, 75......................................Position . 140

................................Turn Signal . 140....................................Load Limits . 311

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 149

Index

J

K

L

I

501

06/12/06 11:36:44 32SMR600_504

Locks.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 149

............................Fuel Fill Door . 299..................................Glove Box . 176

...............................Power Door . 151......................................Tailgate . 158

........................Low Coolant Level . 304.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 83

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 77, 464.........................Lower Anchorages . 49

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 322Lubricant Specifications

..........................................Chart . 490....................Luggage Area Cover . 167.....................Luggage Area Light . 402

.............................Luggage Hooks . 313................Luggage, How to Carry . 311

..........................Luggage, Storing . 310

..................................Maintenance . 353Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 356........................................Record . 363

..........................................Safety . 354

....................................Schedule . 355Malfunction Indicator

..................................Lamp . 467, 468...................Manual Transmission . 322

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 377Maximum Allowable Shift

........................................Speeds . 324.........................Meters, Gauges . 72, 84

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 172...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 308

........mph to km/h Change Button . 85........................................MP3 . 226, 255

.............Multi-Information Display . 89

..................New Vehicle Break-in . 298.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 323

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i.......Numbers, Identification . 484, 486

Octane Requirement,..........................................Petrol . 298

.........................................Odometer . 93

...............................Odometer, Trip . 93Oil

......................Change, When to . 355

......................Checking Engine . 301..................Level Indicator . 103, 465

..............Pressure Indicator . 77, 464Selecting Proper Viscosity

..............................Chart . 368, 370................Oil Level Indicator . 103, 465

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 150..................One-push Turn Signal . 140

............................Outside Mirrors . 172....Outside Temperature Indicator . 93

............Overheating, Engine . 460, 462....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 356

..............................Paddle Shifters . 328

..............................Paint Touch-up . 426............Panel Brightness Control . 144

...........................................Parking . 337...............................Parking Brake . 174

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 77, 470

Index

P

M

N

O

502

06/12/06 11:36:49 32SMR600_505

CONTINUED

................................Safety Belts . 10, 22.................................Safety Features . 9

.........................................Airbags . 12.....................................Seat Belts . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 66...............................Safety Messages . ii

Parking Over Things That............................................Burn . 337

..............................................Petrol . 298................Filling the Fuel Tank . 299

...........................................Filter . 384...........................Fuel Economy . 307

...........................................Gauge . 86.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 83

................Octane Requirement . 298....................................Refueling . 299

..................Polishing and Waxing . 425...................................Pollen Filter . 406

..............................Position Lights . 140........................Power Door Locks . 151

............................Power Windows . 168.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 20

.............Priming the Fuel System . 421..................Proper Seat Belt Usage . 17

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 14...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20........................Protecting Children . 34.......................Protecting Infants . 41

.......Protecting Larger Children . 60.........Protecting Small Children . 43

Using Child Restraint Systems............................with Tethers . 58

..........Using Lower Anchorages . 49

...........Radiator Overheating . 460, 462...........Radio/Disc Sound System . 212

........................................RDS . 216, 243......................Rear Fog Light . 142, 143

Rear Lights, Bulb......................Replacement . 396, 398

........................Rear Seat, Folding . 164..........................Rear View Mirror . 172

...............Rear Window Demister . 145.............Reclining the Seat Backs . 160

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 323....Reminder Indicators . 72, 73, 74, 75

................Remote Audio Controls . 269.....................Remote Transmitter . 154

Replacement InformationAir Cleaner

.................Element . 380, 381, 383..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 406

..................................Fuel Filter . 384..........................................Fuses . 471

....................................Schedule . 355................................Spark Plugs . 489

..........................................Tyres . 413.............................Wiper Blades . 408

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 25

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 304, 372

...............................Restraint, Child . 34............................Reverse lockout . 325

......................................Roof Rack . 312...............................Rotation, Tyre . 413

Index

R

S

503

06/12/06 11:36:54 32SMR600_506

...................................Seat Belts . 10, 22...............Additional Information . 22

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 24

.....................................Cleaning . 429................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 23

................................Maintenance . 25Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 22, 76...................System Components . 22

...............Use During Pregnancy . 20..................................Seat Heaters . 166

......................Seats, Adjusting the . 160............................Security System . 273...........................Service Intervals . 355

.........Service Station Procedures . 299..........................Setting the Clock . 270

..............................Side Airbags . 12, 29...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29

........................Risks to Children . 38................Side Curtain Airbags . 12, 30

.............................Signaling Turns . 140....................................Snow Tyres . 415

...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 424................................Sound System . 212

.....................................Spare Tyre . 432

.....................................Compact . 432......................................Inflating . 432

............................Specifications . 491....................................Spark Plugs . 489

....................Specifications Charts . 487..................................Speed Alarm . 112...................................Speedometer . 86

Speed-sensitive Volume.......Compensation (SVC) . 224, 253

.......................................Spotlights . 183..........SRS, Additional Information . 27

...Additional Safety Precautions . 32How the SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 30How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 28........................SRS Components . 27

..................................SRS Service . 32.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 79

...........................................START . 150...................Start Button . 318, 319, 320

......Starting the Engine . 318, 319, 320In Cold Weather at High

..................Altitude . 318, 319, 320................With a Dead Battery . 456

Steam Coming from................................Engine . 460, 462

Steering Wheel..............................Adjustments . 147

...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 149...................Stereo Sound System . 212....................Storing Your Vehicle . 420

......................................Sunshades . 170...............................Super Locking . 153

Supplemental Restraint................................System . 12, 27......................................Servicing . 32

.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 79...................System Components . 27

........System Message Indicator . 79System Warning Symbols,

.....Multi-Information Display . 94

.....................................Tachometer . 86..........................................Tailgate . 158

..............................Open Monitor . 99......................................Opening . 158

Tail-lights, Changing Bulbs.........................................in . 396, 398

Index

T

504

06/12/06 11:36:59 32SMR600_507

CONTINUED

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 431...........................Tape Player . 235, 265

Technical Descriptions..........Catalytic Converter . 493, 494

.......................Temperature Gauge . 86........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 211

.....................Tether Anchor Points . 58..........................Time, Setting the . 270

..................Tools, Tyre Changing . 434Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 345................Emergency Wrecker . 479

Equipment and Accessories.................Weight Limit . 345, 346

.............Towbar Mounting Points . 487.....................Trailer Loading . 345, 346

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 349Transmission

...........................Fluid Selection . 377......Identification Number . 484, 485

..................Shifting the Manual . 322.................Shifting the i-SHIFT . 326

.....................................Treadwear . 412

.......................................Trip Meter . 93..................................Turn Signals . 140...................................Tyre Chains . 416

........Tyre, How to Change a Flat . 434..............................................Tyres . 411

..............................Air Pressure . 411........................................Chains . 416

.........................Checking Wear . 412..........................Compact Spare . 432

......................................Inflation . 411..................................Inspection . 412

..............................Maintenance . 413...................................Replacing . 413

......................................Rotating . 413...........................................Snow . 415

....................Specifications . 414, 491.TRK (Temporary Repair Kit) . 440

.........................Ultrasonic Sensor . 275.....................Underside, Cleaning . 430

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 431

.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 427

................................Vanity Mirror . 180

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 311......................Vehicle Dimensions . 487

....Vehicle Identification Number . 486Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 341.............................Vehicle Storage . 420

.............................Ventilation . 193, 195.................................................VIN . 486

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 428.........................Viscosity, Oil . 368, 370

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 66

Washer, Windscreen........Checking the Fluid Level . 376

...................................Operation . 137.........................................Washing . 424

.....................Water Draining . 109, 384..................Waxing and Polishing . 425

Index

V

W

U

505

06/12/06 11:37:04 32SMR600_508

Wheels.............Adjusting the Steering . 147............Alignment and Balance . 413

.....Cleaning Aluminium Alloys . 425..........................Compact Spare . 432

...............................Nut Wrench . 436Windows

.............................Auto Reverse . 169.....................................Cleaning . 428

................Operating the Power . 168..........................Rear, Demister . 145

WindscreenAutomatic Intermittent

....................................Wipers . 137.............................Cleaning . 137, 428.....................................Washers . 137

.................................Winter Tyres . 415Wiper Blades

....................................Changing . 408...................................Operation . 137

......................................WMA . 226, 255...................................Worn Tyres . 412

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 479

Index

506

06/12/06 11:37:08 32SMR600_509